GE 5205000 Скачать руководство пользователя страница 715

Страница: 715 / 808

GE
D

IRECTION

5535208-100, R

. 2

LOGIQ E9 S

ERVICE

ANUAL

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts

9 - 53

19.

GTX 2.3

with CW Resistor

(R1.0.6 or later)

5201044-4

Replaced by 5201044-3

Part of CW option

same functionality, 5201044-3 is a

cost reduced board

See:

Table 9-26 "GTX Boards Compatible

Configurations" on page 9-63

20.

GTX 2.3

with CW Resistor

(R1.0.6 or later)

5201044-3

Replaces by 5201044-4

Part of CW option

See:

Table 9-26 "GTX Boards Compatible

Configurations" on page 9-63

21.

LE9 GTX 2.4, Shearwave Support

(R5.x.x or later)

5201044-6

Part of CW option

See:

Table 9-26 "GTX Boards Compatible

Configurations" on page 9-63

Table 9-21 Card Rack parts 6 of 11 (Continued)

ITEM

PART NAME

PART NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

QTY

FRU

Q7_4

Q5_4

Q7_3

Q5_3

Q7_2

Q5_2

Q7_1

Q5_1

HS1

VR5

VR3

VR2

VR1

C721

C332

R65

R408

R22

R27

R23

R24

R64

R63

C10

FL8

R19

CR2

TP22

TP16

FL9

C16
C9

FL11

TP23

SP2

SP1

C11

C103

FL12

C17

CR1

C41

TP34

TP27

MP6

MP5

MP7

R32

C720

C605

FL14

TP37

R50

R800

TP800

R802

L800

L801

C111

R524

VR6

C61

MP1

U800

C800

MP2

C126

C723

C159

R82
R78

C120

TP61

R807

C813

R806

C811

C808

C807

C68

C67

R218

FL18

R87

R91

R110

C83

R109

R111

R114

R113

R112

R85

R83

R79

R74

TP57

R70

R125

C814

R810

R809

C810

C809

Q800

T800

D800

C92

C91

C127

C110

R97

CR4

R151

R118

R123

R134

R122
R117

R133

R93

R702

R152

U16

45 R1

R141

TP220

U801

C816

C815

MP3

CR3

C115

SP3

R157

C121

C95

MP1

R816

C817

C310

R131

C131

R170

R167

MP10

C818

C105

C819

C821

MP9

Q801

MP4

D802

MP1

R345

C722

C136

TP2

DS9

DS1

TP1

J12

T4_16

T3_16

T2_16

T1_16

T4_15

T3_15

T2_15

T1_15

T4_14

T3_14

T2_14

T1_14

T4_13

T3_13

T2_13

T1_13

T4_12

T3_12

T2_12

T1_12

T4_11

T3_11

T2_11

T1_11

T4_10

T3_10

T2_10

T1_10

T4_9

T3_9

T2_9

TP4

T1_9

T4_8

T3_8

T2_8

T1_8

T4_7

T3_7

T2_7

T1_7

T4_6

T3_6

T2_6

T1_6

T4_5

T3_5

T2_5

T1_5

T4_4

T3_4

T2_4

T1_4

T4_3

T3_3

T2_3

T1_3

T4_2

T3_2

T2_2

T1_2

T4_1

T3_1

T2_1

T1_1

R3_16

R1_16

R3_15

R1_15

R3_14

R1_14

R3_13

R1_13

R3_12

R1_12

R3_11

R1_11

R3_10

R1_10

R3_9

R1_9

R3_8

R1_8

R3_7

R1_7

R3_6

R1_6

R3_5

R1_5

R3_4

R1_4

R3_3

R1_3

R3_2

R1_2

R3_1

R1_1

R4_16

R2_16

R4_15

R2_15

R4_14

R2_14

R4_13

R2_13

R4_12

R2_12

R4_11

R2_11

R4_10

R2_10

R4_9

R2_9

R4_8

R2_8

R4_7

R2_7

R4_6

R2_6

R4_5

R2_5

R4_4

R2_4

R4_3

R2_3

R4_2

R2_2

R4_1

R2_1

R8_16

R7_16

R6_16

R5_16

R8_15

R7_15

R6_15

R5_15

R8_14

R7_14

R6_14

R5_14

R8_13

R7_13

R6_13

R5_13

R8_12

R7_12

R6_12

R5_12

R8_11

R7_11

R6_11

R5_11

R8_10

R7_10

R6_10

R5_10

R8_9

R7_9

R6_9

R5_9

R8_8

R7_8

R6_8

R5_8

R8_7

R7_7

R6_7

R5_7

R8_6

R7_6

R6_6

R5_6

R8_5

R7_5

R6_5

R5_5

R8_4

R7_4

R6_4

R5_4

R8_3

R7_3

R6_3

R5_3

R8_2

R7_2

R6_2

R5_2

R8_1

R7_1

R6_1

R5_1

Q4_16

Q2_16

Q4_15

Q2_15

Q4_14

Q2_14

Q4_13

Q2_13

Q4_12

Q2_12

Q4_11

Q2_11

Q4_10

Q2_10

Q4_9

Q2_9

Q4_8

Q2_8

Q4_7

Q2_7

Q4_6

Q2_6

Q4_5

Q2_5

Q4_4

Q2_4

Q4_3

Q2_3

Q4_2

Q2_2

Q4_1

Q2_1

R12_16

U3_16

R11_16

R12_15

U3_15

R11_15

R12_14

U3_14

R11_14

R12_13

U3_13

R11_13

R12_12

U3_12

R11_12

R12_11

U3_11

R11_11

R12_10

U3_10

R11_10

R12_9

U3_9

R11_9

R12_8

U3_8

R11_8

R12_7

U3_7

R11_7

R12_6

U3_6

R11_6

R12_5

U3_5

R11_5

R12_4

U3_4

R11_4

R12_3

U3_3

R11_3

R12_2

U3_2

R11_2

R12_1

U3_1

R11_1

R14_16

R13_16

R14_15

R13_15

R14_14

R13_14

R14_13

R13_13

R14_12

R13_12

R14_11

R13_11

R14_10

R13_10

R14_9

R13_9

R14_8

R13_8

R14_7

R13_7

R14_6

R13_6

R14_5

R13_5

R14_4

R13_4

R14_3

R13_3

R14_2

R13_2

R14_1

R13_1

Q3_16

Q8_16

Q1_16

Q6_16

Q3_15

Q8_15

Q1_15

Q6_15

Q3_14

Q8_14

Q1_14

Q6_14

Q3_13

Q8_13

Q6_13

Q1_13

Q3_12

Q8_12

Q1_12

Q6_12

Q3_11

Q8_11

Q1_11

Q6_11

Q3_10

Q8_10

Q1_10

Q6_10

Q3_9

Q8_9

Q1_9

Q6_9

Q3_8

Q8_8

Q1_8

Q6_8

Q3_7

Q8_7

Q1_7

Q6_7

Q3_6

Q8_6

Q1_6

Q6_6

Q3_5

Q8_5

Q1_5

Q6_5

Q3_4

Q8_4

Q1_4

Q6_4

Q3_3

Q8_3

Q1_3

Q6_3

Q3_2

Q8_2

Q1_2

Q6_2

Q3_1

Q8_1

Q1_1

Q6_1

R18_16

U8_16

R17_16

R18_15

U8_15

R17_15

R18_14

U8_14

R17_14

R18_13

U8_13

R17_13

R18_12

U8_12

R17_12

R18_11

U8_11

R17_11

R18_10

U8_10

R17_10

R18_9

U8_9

R17_9

R18_8

U8_8

R17_8

R18_7

U8_7

R17_7

R18_6

U8_6

R17_6

R18_5

U8_5

R17_5

R18_4

U8_4

R17_4

R18_3

U8_3

R17_3

R18_2

U8_2

R17_2

R18_1

U8_1

R17_1

R20_16

R19_16

R20_15

R19_15

R20_14

R19_14

R20_13

R19_13

R20_12

R19_12

R20_11

R19_11

R20_10

R19_10

R20_9

R19_9

R20_8

R19_8

R20_7

R19_7

R20_6

R19_6

R20_5

R19_5

R20_4

R19_4

R20_3

R19_3

R20_2

R19_2

R20_1

R19_1

Q7_16

Q5_16

Q7_15

Q5_15

Q7_14

Q5_14

Q7_13

Q5_13

Q7_12

Q5_12

Q7_11

Q5_11

Q7_10

Q5_10

Q7_9

Q5_9

Q7_8

Q5_8

Q7_7

Q5_7

Q7_6

Q5_6

Q7_5

Q5_5

)

11V

T16

24V

50M

_Q_N

50M

_Q_P

D
E

8_1

D
E

B
C

CH3

CH2

PW_P

CH3

PW_P

CH2

CH3

AB1

10V

2_T

10V

4_T

AB22

AB2

3_C

LOC

AB2

24V

24VP

A16

8_2

CH3

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

e P

ts A

rrangem

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH0

CH1

CH0

CH1

PW_P

CH0

CH1

CH0
PW_P

CH2

CH3

D
C
B
A

8:G

D
C
B
A

F
E

CH3

CH0

CH1

CH2

GTX2.4

BAR CODE

5201044-3

5201045-

REV

PWB

w/o R

Содержание 5205000

Страница 1: ...10 20 14 GEHC_FRNT_CVR FM LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Part Number 5535208 100 Revision Rev 2 ...

Страница 2: ......

Страница 3: ... 1 1 Service manual overview 1 1 Important conventions 1 5 Safety considerations 1 15 Label locations 1 20 Dangerous procedure warnings 1 21 Lockout Tagout LOTO requirements 1 22 Returning Shipping Probes and Repair Parts 1 23 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC 1 24 Customer assistance 1 26 ...

Страница 4: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 2 CHAPTER 2 Site preparations Overview 2 1 General console requirements 2 1 Facility needs 2 7 ...

Страница 5: ... Setup Overview 3 1 Setup reminders 3 2 Receiving and unpacking the equipment 3 4 Packing materials recycling information 3 12 Preparing for setup 3 13 Completing the setup 3 16 Configuration 3 32 Connectivity overview 3 37 Connectivity Setup and Tips 3 38 Setup paperwork 3 79 ...

Страница 6: ...Functional Checks Overview 4 1 General procedures 4 2 Functional checks 4 31 Application Turnover Check List 4 47 Power supply test and adjustments 4 47 3D 4D and Volume Navigation Functional Check 4 48 SWAVE Shear Wave Shear Elasto Functional Check 4 48 Site Log 4 49 ...

Страница 7: ...heory Overview 5 1 LOGIQ E9 description 5 3 Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel 5 16 Main Console 5 21 Air Flow control 5 22 Casters and Brakes description 5 22 Power distribution 5 23 Power Loss description 5 33 Cables for LOGIQ E9 5 33 Probes description 5 33 Product manuals 5 34 ...

Страница 8: ... LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 6 CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustments Overview 6 1 LCD Monitor adjustments 6 1 DC Offset Calibration 6 8 Operator Panel movement 6 9 Direction Lock and Brake adjustments 6 16 Adjust time out for DICOM servers 6 16 ...

Страница 9: ... 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 7 CHAPTER 7 Diagnostics Troubleshooting Overview 7 1 Service Safety Considerations 7 1 Gathering Troubleshooting Data 7 1 Screen Captures 7 18 Common Service Desktop 7 19 ...

Страница 10: ...t 8 6 Loading Reloading Upgrading the Software 8 7 Replacing Covers and Bumpers 8 29 Replacing Top Console Parts 8 87 Main Console parts replacement 8 175 Casters and Brakes replacement 8 192 BEP Back End Processor parts replacement 8 198 Main Power Supply parts replacement 8 244 Peripherals replacement 8 269 V Nav Roll Stand and or On Board Stand Installation and or Replacement 8 298 ...

Страница 11: ...ftware compatibility 9 4 Software 9 5 Covers and Bumpers 9 9 Top Console parts 9 17 XYZ Mechanism parts 9 38 Main Console parts 9 42 Casters Wheels parts 9 46 Card Rack parts 9 48 Back End Processor BEP parts 9 64 Main Power Supply parts 9 72 Peripherals 9 76 Mains Power Cables 9 82 Internal Cables 9 84 Probes 9 102 Options 9 106 Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment...

Страница 12: ...Q E9 SERVICE MANUAL 10 CHAPTER 10 Care Maintenance Overview 10 1 Why do Maintenance 10 2 Maintenance Task Schedule 10 2 System maintenance 10 3 Using a Phantom 10 9 Electrical Safety Tests 10 9 When There s Too Much Leakage Current 10 27 ...

Страница 13: ...T AU CLIENT QU IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE NE PAS TENTER D INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS LE NON RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN L OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES DIESES KUNDENDIENST HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE FALLS EIN FREMDER ...

Страница 14: ...O A CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA ESTÁ DISPONÍVEL APENAS EM INGLÊS SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA QUE NÃO A GEHC SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO NÃO TENTE EFECTUAR REPARAÇÕES NO EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO PREVIAMENTE ESTE MANUAL A INOBSERVÂNCIA DESTE AVISO...

Страница 15: ...OITTUMINEN SÄHKÖISKUN MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ ΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ Ε...

Страница 16: ...E SLUŽEB OBSLUŽNÉHO PERSONÁLU NEBO PACIENTŮ VLIVEM ELEKTRICKÉHOP PROUDU RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKÉHO POŠKOZENÍ NEBO JINÉMU RIZIKU DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END ENGELSK ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET MANGLENDE OVER...

Страница 17: ...EISTAS DĖL ELEKTROS SMŪGIO MECHANINIŲ AR KITŲ PAVOJŲ DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT SERVICELEVERANDØREN OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ GRUNN ...

Страница 18: ...СТ ПО ТЕХОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ ОПЕРАТОР ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЗЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ТОВА СЕРВИЗНО РЪКОВОДСТВО Е НАЛИЧНО САМО НА АНГЛИЙСКИ ЕЗИК АКО ДОСТАВЧИКЪТ НА СЕРВИЗНИ УСЛУГИ НА КЛИЕНТ СЕ НУЖДАЕ ОТ ЕЗИК РАЗЛИЧЕН ОТ АНГЛИЙСКИ ЗАДЪЛЖЕНИЕ НА КЛИЕНТА Е ДА ПРЕДОСТАВИ ПРЕВОДАЧЕСКА УСЛУГА НЕ СЕ ОПИТВАЙТЕ ДА ИЗВЪРШВАТЕ СЕРВИЗНО ОБСЛУЖВАНЕ НА ТОВА ОБОРУДВАНЕ ОСВЕН ВСЛУ...

Страница 19: ... STRUJNIM UDAROM MEHANIČKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA TÁTO SERVISNÁ PRÍRUČKA JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIČTINE AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATEĽ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO ANGLIČTINU POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATEĽSKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE ZODPOVEDNOSŤOU ZÁKAZNÍKA NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA VYKONÁVAŤ SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKÔR AKO SI NEPREČÍTATE SERVISNÚ PRÍRUČKU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA MÔŽE VYÚSTIŤ DO ZRANENIA PO...

Страница 20: ...ZCE DIŞINDAKİ BİR DİLDE OLMASINI İSTERSE KILAVUZU TERCÜME ETTİRMEK MÜŞTERİNİN SORUMLULUĞUNDADIR SERVİS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKİPMANLARA MÜDAHALE ETMEYİNİZ BU UYARININ GÖZ ARDI EDİLMESİ ELEKTRİK ÇARPMASI YA DA MEKANİK VEYA DİĞER TÜRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKNİSYENİN OPERATÖRÜN YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇABİLİR DİKKAT TR JA Traditional Chinese ...

Страница 21: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 19 ZH CN KO ...

Страница 22: ...al work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel i e GE s field engineers personnel of third party service companies with equivalent training or licensed electricians to perform electrical servicing on the equipment OMISSIONS ERRORS If there are any omissions errors or suggestions for...

Страница 23: ...service software does not extend to or cover this software or related documentation If you are a GE Healthcare employee or a customer who has entered into such a license agreement with GE Healthcare to use this proprietary software you are authorized to use this Material according to the conditions stated in your license agreement However you do not have the permission of GE Healthcare to alter de...

Страница 24: ...1 R5 Release Rev 2 2014 10 13 Remove duplicate TOC from Chapter 1 ECR 2124250 Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision Title Page Rev 2 4 1 to 4 54 Rev 2 10 1 to 10 28 Rev 2 Warnings Rev 2 5 1 to 5 34 Rev 2 Back Cover N A TOC Rev 2 6 1 to 6 16 Rev 2 1 1 to 1 28 Rev 2 7 1 to 7 98 Rev 2 2 1 to 2 12 Rev 2 8 1 to 8 316 Rev 2 3 1 to 3 80 Rev 2 9 1 to 9 116 Rev 2 ...

Страница 25: ... for the agreed upon time period This service manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanning unit It is divided in 10 chapters as shown below in Table 1 1 Contents in this service manual on page 1 2 Indications for Use The LOGIQ E9 is intended for use by a qualified physician for ultrasound evaluation Specific clinical applications and exam types include ...

Страница 26: ...ecklist 4 Functional Checks Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the installation or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance 5 Components and Functions Theory Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics 6 Service Adjustments Contains instructions on how to make any available adjustments to the LOGIQ E9 7 Diagnostics Troubleshooting P...

Страница 27: ...manual applies to all LOGIQ E9 models Table 1 2 LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware Software Compatibility Upgrade Options CONSOLE MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION Phase I BT2010 BT2011 BT2013 BT2014 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 2 0 3 2 0 4 2 0 5 3 1 2 3 1 3 4 Rev x x 5 Rev x x 5205000 LOGIQ E9 00 240 VAC Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U 5205...

Страница 28: ...cture of the LOGIQ E9 unit allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe types throughout the full spectrum of operating frequencies Signal flows from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End and then over to the Back End Processor and finally to the monitor and peripherals System configuration is stored on the hard drive in the Back End Processor All necessary software is loaded from the...

Страница 29: ...eled in one of three ways DANGER WARNING CAUTION When a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk a NOTICE is used Notice Example Disk drive may crash NOTE Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure NOTE Be sure to read the notes the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort DANGER DANGER IS...

Страница 30: ...gle as seen throughout this chapter In addition to text several different graphical icons symbols may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm Even if a symbol isn t used in this manual it may be included for your reference Table 1 3 Standard hazard icons DANGER WARNING CAUTION BIOLOGICAL ELECTRICAL MOVING ACOUSTIC OUTPUT EXPLOSION SMOKE FIRE LASER HEAT...

Страница 31: ...ther icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed Table 1 4 Standard hazard icons cont d RADIATION Table 1 5 Standard Icons that indicate that a special procedure is to be used AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION HAND PROTECTION FOOT PROTECTION Signed Date TAG LOCKOUT OR ...

Страница 32: ...ype Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection United States only Prescription Requirement label Rear panel Authorized European Representative address Rear panel Equipment Type BF man in the box symbol IEC 878 02 03 indicates B Type equipment having a floating applied part Probe connectors including Doppler probe connector Equipment Type BF Applied Part man in the box with pad...

Страница 33: ...ION Consult accompanying documents is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label Rear Cover Rear of LCD Monitor Miscellaneous Probe Labels Follow Instructions for Use ATTENTION Consult accompanying documents is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complet...

Страница 34: ...with other symbols to advise or warn the user Various Shear Wave Option Capacitor Pack ATTENTION Consult accompanying documents is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label General Warning Various Rear Cover Probe Label Warning Dangerous Voltage the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangl...

Страница 35: ...GE For disconnecting LOGIQ E9 from mains voltage after system shutdown please set the circuit breaker close to the mains inlet to OFF as described in 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 Operating Panel Protective Earth Indicates the protective earth grounding terminal Used several places inside the system Equipotential Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting equipotential conductors when in...

Страница 36: ...CD Monitor inside ETL Listing Mark Monogram Rear Panel GOST Symbol Russia Regulatory Country Clearance Rear Panel ISO 7010 P007 Volume Navigation Pacemaker Warning V Nav Transmitter Indicates the presence of hazardous substance s above the maximum concentration value Maximum concentration values for electronic information products as set by the People s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standa...

Страница 37: ...ed diphenyl ether PBDE 20 indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance s will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution bodily injury or damage to any assets China Rating Plate LCD and Operator Panel information and warnings Rear of the LCD monitor How to lower LCD prior to transport How to lock Operator Panel pri...

Страница 38: ...t handling instructions when servicing consoles that are used in a veterinary environment Non ionizing Electromagnetic Radiation Label Rear Panel Table 1 7 Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment LABEL LOCATION Side Covers Back Cover Probe s Table 1 6 Product icons Continued 7 of 7 LABEL SYMBOL PURPOSE MEANING LOCATION For Veterinary use only 5454608 5447716 ...

Страница 39: ...TESTING AND ADJUSTING WARNING WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E9 SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED EVEN WHILE IN SHUTDOWN MODE WARNING WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS GE HAS LIMITED THE LIFTING WEIGHT FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG 35 LBS ...

Страница 40: ...wer is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet WARNING WARNING Risk of electrical shock system must be turned off and disconnected from power source Cord must be controlled at all times Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation The Amber light on the Op Panel On Off button will turn off Beware that the Main Power S...

Страница 41: ... AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE PROBE FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE WARNING WARNING REMEMBER If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation pressing the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock You must depress the release pedal a second time to engage the brake WARNING WARNING Th...

Страница 42: ...UNCONTROLLED MOTION AND COSTLY DAMAGE ALWAYS BE SURE THE PATHWAY IS CLEAR USE SLOW CAREFUL MOTIONS USE TWO PEOPLE WHEN MOVING ON INCLINES OR LIFTING MORE THAN 16 KG 35 LBS CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY OR DAMAGE TO THE MONITOR MAKE SURE THERE IS NOTHING WITHIN RANGE OF THE LCD BEFORE MOVING THE MONITOR AND MONITOR ARM THIS INCLUDES PEOPLE AS WELL AS THINGS CAUTION Ensure that nobody touches the console ...

Страница 43: ...cuit breaker for 100 VAC for Japan The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment Both the system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards 1 4 4 2 Probes Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the housing cable strain relief...

Страница 44: ...cations Refer to the approriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual Chapter 2 Table 1 8 LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual per console CONSOLE MODEL NUMBER ENGLISH BASIC USER MANUAL DIRECTION NUMBER 5205000 5180374 100 5205000 2 3 5335626 100 5205000 4 5 5389558 100 5205000 6 7 5450756 100 5205000 8 5496408 100 ...

Страница 45: ...TESTING AND ADJUSTING WARNING WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E9 SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE WARNING WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD WARNING WA...

Страница 46: ...GIQ E9 When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts 1 Turn off the scanner 2 Unplug the system 3 Maintain control of the system power plug 4 Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation The Amber light on the Op Panel On Off button will turn off 5 DISCONNECT THE EPS EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN BA...

Страница 47: ...regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry as well as the people who will receive or open this package NOTE The US Department of Transportation DOT has ruled that items that were saturated and or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood or which were used or intended for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purposes and must...

Страница 48: ...radio frequency or electromagnetic interference RFI EMI and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables In addition to electromagnetic energy EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields magnetic fields electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply 1 9 2 Compliance LOGIQ E9 conforms to all applicable conducted and ra...

Страница 49: ... OF THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING Risk of electrical shock system must be turned off Avoid all contact with electrical contacts conductors and components Always use non conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be dis...

Страница 50: ...l distributor or appropriate support resource as listed below Before you call identify the following information and acquire image Alt D to send to the Customer Care team 1 System ID serial number 2 Software version 3 Date and time of occurrence 4 Sequence of events leading to issue 5 Is the issue repeatable 6 Imaging mode probe preset application 7 Media brand speed capacity type 8 Save secondary...

Страница 51: ...n America Service Application Support 1 262 524 5300 1 262 524 5698 Europe GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH Beethovenstrasse 239 Postfach 11 05 60 D 42655 Solingen Germany Support Phone 49 0 212 2802 652 Support Fax 49 0 2122 8024 31 EAGM Egypt Service Center UAE Service Center 0020 2322 1252 00971 8003646 Asia Singapore GE Ultrasound Asia Service Department Ultrasound 298 Tiong Bahru Road 15 01 06...

Страница 52: ...iagnostics LLC 9900 Innovation Drive Wauwatosa WI 53226 USA 414 721 3865 Table 1 11 Authorized Representative AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE TELEPHONE FAX NUMBER The location of the CE marking is shown in the Safety chapter of this manual Authorized EU Representative European registered place of business GE Medical Systems Information Technologies GmbH GEMS IT GmbH Munzinger Strasse 3 D 79111 Freiburg ...

Страница 53: ...he device to stabilize before powering up The following table describes guidelines for reaching operational temperatures from storage or transport temperatures See Table 2 1 2 2 1 2 Environmental specifications Table 2 1 LOGIQ E9 Acclimate Time o C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 o F 140 131 122 113 104 95 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 4 13 22 31 40 Hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0...

Страница 54: ...oom Each person in the room places an additional 300 Btu hr demand on the cooling system 2 2 1 4 Lighting Bright light is needed for LOGIQ E9 installation updates and repairs However operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect Therefore a combination lighting system dim bright is recommended Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source...

Страница 55: ... two lines not shared with any other circuit and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the LOGIQ E9 outlet NOTE Please note that image artifacts can occur if at any time within the facility the ground from the main facility s incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit 2 2 2 2 Electrical requirements for LOGIQ E9 In the table below the electrical specifications ...

Страница 56: ...ent local state and national electrical codes 2 2 2 6 LOGIQ E9 power plug If the LOGIQ E9 arrives without a power plug or with the wrong plug you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required 2 2 2 7 Power stability requirements Voltage drop out Max 10 ms Power transients all applications Less than 25 of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 milliseco...

Страница 57: ...likely reason a LOGIQ E9 will have noisy images Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet Replace all screws RF gaskets covers cores After you finish repairing or updating the LOGIQ E9 replace all covers and tighten all screws Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end Install the Card Rack cover over the Card Rack Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow ...

Страница 58: ... C 14 to 140 ºF 10 to 60 C 14 to 140 ºF 10o to 50 o C 14 to 122 ºF Temperatures in degrees Celsius o C conversion to degrees F o F o C 9 5 32 NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF 10 TO 50 degrees C or 60 degrees C DEPENDING ON THE TYPE OF PROBE WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE US...

Страница 59: ... qualified personnel The products involved and the accompanying electrical installations are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment The desire to use a...

Страница 60: ...cated line shall consist of one phase two lines not shared with any other circuit and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage see Table 2 3 Electrical specifications for the LOGIQ E9 on page 2 3 meeting all local and national codes which is located less than 2 5 m 8 ft from the LOGIQ E9 s proposed locati...

Страница 61: ...ctors Desk 2 File Cabinet 3 Film Viewer 4 Counter Top 5 Counter Top and Sink with hot and cold water 6 Overhead Lights Dimmer Dual Level Lighting bright and dim 7 Emergency Oxygen 8 Suction Line 9 LOGIQ E9 10 Dedicated Power Outlet Circuit Breaker protected and easily accessible 11 Network Interface 12 457 mm 18 inches distance of LOGIQ E9 from wall or objects 13 Stool 14 Footswitch 15 Storage for...

Страница 62: ...cold water and Supplies Storage 4 Linen Supply 5 Probes Supplies 6 Examination Table 1930 x 610 mm 76 x 24 inches 7 Footswitch 8 Stool 9 LOGIQ E9 10 External Peripherals 11 Dedicated Power Outlet Circuit Breaker protected and easily accessible 12 Network Interface 13 457 mm 18 inches distance of LOGIQ E9 from wall or objects 14 GE Cabinet for Software and Manuals 4 1 3 11 6 13 1 2 1 2 Auto Auto B ...

Страница 63: ...e while scanning continues With DICOM images can be archived stored and retrieved faster easier and at a lower cost 2 3 5 5 DICOM option setup requirements To configure the LOGIQ E9 to work with other network connections the site s network administrator must provide information to complete the form in Figure 2 3 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information on page 2 12 Ensure that there are no spaces i...

Страница 64: ...tore 3 Store 1 MAKE IP PORT AE TITLE DICOM Print Storage Commit DICOM MPPS Worklist Network Speed Associated Storage AE _____________ __Raw Data __Allow Multiframe __Structured Reporting Compression_______ __Raw Data __Allow Multiframe __Structured Reporting Compression_______ __Raw Data __Allow Multiframe __Structured Reporting Compression_______ Vendor ___________ Print Size _________ Medium ___...

Страница 65: ...r This chapter contains information needed to set up the LOGIQ E9 Included is a procedure that describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual setup and how to check and test the unit probes and external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure ...

Страница 66: ...TION 2 HOURS OR MORE DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION INSTALL INSITE ILINK 0 5 HOUR DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE I E METER S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN DON T TOUCH THE UNIT CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK CONNECT THE UNIT TO A PROPERLY GROUNDED POWER OUTLET DO NOT USE A THREE TO TWO PRONG ADAPTER THIS DEFEATS SAFETY GROUNDING CAUTION DO NOT WEAR ...

Страница 67: ... THE USER MANUAL S SHOULD BE FULLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD BEFORE OPERATING THE LOGIQ E9 AND KEPT NEAR THE UNIT FOR QUICK REFERENCE CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD ALTHOUGH THE ULTRASOUND ENERGY TRANSMITTED FROM THE LOGIQ E9 PROBE IS WITHIN AIUM NEMA STANDARDS AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE ULTRASOUND ENERGY CAN PRODUCE HEAT AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE ...

Страница 68: ...3 3 2 Receiving and unpacking warnings CAUTION TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO UNPACK THE UNIT BECAUSE OF ITS WEIGHT ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE UNIT CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE BY ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED WHENEVER A PART WEIGHING 16 KG 35 LBS OR MORE MUST BE LIFTED CAUTION REMEMBER TO USE RELEVANT PERSONAL PROTECTING EQUIPMENT PPE DURING PACKING UN...

Страница 69: ...age is apparent Table 3 2 Damage in transportation STEP TASK 1 Write Damage In Shipment on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or signed for by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent 2 Report the damage to the carrier Whether noted or concealed damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery or in any event within 14 days after receipt a...

Страница 70: ...tion has been improper a Tilt or TIPNTELL indicator and a Shock indicator have been attached to the transportation box 3 3 4 2 Position of the Tilt or TipNTell and Shock indicators The Tilt and Shock indicators have been attached to the side of the transportation box NOTE Before cutting the straps check the Tilt or TIPNTELL and Shock indicators to make sure they have not been triggered If triggere...

Страница 71: ...OGIQ E9 Transportation Box Label is located on the transportation box Figure 3 3 LOGIQ E9 Transportation Box Labeling SYMBOL DEFINITION COMMENTS SYMBOL DEFINITION COMMENTS RECYCLING Recyclable Wood or RECYCLING China Specific KEEP DRY protect from moisture FRAGILE Handle with Care TOP UPRIGHT Transportation and Storage DO NOT STACK ...

Страница 72: ...ing the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound scanning unit Images are ONLY for reference wear proper PPE when handling packaging gloves safety shoes etc Table 3 3 Uncrating Instructions Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Before cutting the straps check Shock and Tilt Tags to make sure they have not been triggered If damaged report it to the carrier If not then cut the straps around the crate 2 Remove the top cover 1 2 ...

Страница 73: ...Q E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 9 3 Remove the outside shipping box Note Two people are recommended for performing this step 4 Remove the LCD foam Table 3 3 Uncrating Instructions Continued Steps Corresponding Graphic 3 4 ...

Страница 74: ... 10 Section 3 3 Receiving and unpacking the equipment 5 Remove the a Probes and b accessory boxes 6 Remove the L shaped Cardboard divider Note Use special care when removing the divider Table 3 3 Uncrating Instructions Continued Steps Corresponding Graphic 6 ...

Страница 75: ...d between the lower OP panel and the wooden ramp by moving upward and back Remove the wooden ramp 9 Attach the wooden ramp to the Pallet Base with Velcro on the rear side of the LOGIQ E9 10 Loosen the tie down strap at the front of the LOGIQ E9 Push the brass piece to pull back handle then push brass piece to loosen strap Table 3 3 Uncrating Instructions Continued Steps Corresponding Graphic 7 8 ...

Страница 76: ...e made of Ethafoam Polyethylene foam The plastic foil is made of LDPE Low Density Polyethylene 11 Disconnect the tie down strap at the rear of the LOGIQ E9 12 Pull the LOGIQ E9 down the Pallet Base ramp Note Remember to pull in the LOGIQ E9 from the back for safer transportation 13 Remove the clear plastic wrapped around the LOGIQ E9 from the unit 14 Place all of the filling inside the Transportat...

Страница 77: ...tion Verify that the LOGIQ E9 arrived intact visual inspection If the LOGIQ E9 has been damaged please refer to Damage in Transportation on page x in the beginning of this manual 3 5 2 1 LOGIQ E9 voltage settings See 3 6 3 1 Verification of the LOGIQ E9 s voltage setting on page 3 17 3 5 3 Volume Navigation Stand To assemble the Volume Navigation Stand See 8 15 2 Assembling or replacing the Roll S...

Страница 78: ...E MANUAL 3 14 Section 3 5 Preparing for setup 3 5 3 1 Back Cover Label and ETL testing laboratories safety rating label ETL may not be present Figure 3 4 Back Cover Label with ETL Label Figure 3 5 Rating Plate Label R3 x and earlier 100 120V shown ...

Страница 79: ...nimize the effects of Electro Magnetic Interference EMI Many of the covers shields and screws are provided primarily to protect the LOGIQ E9 from image artifacts caused by this interference For this reason it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation See 2 2 3 EMI limitations on page 2 5 for more information about EMI protection Figu...

Страница 80: ...unit are summarized in Table 3 4 Dimensions given with floating keyboard stowed for transport and the LCD Monitor down 3 6 2 3 Weight with monitor and peripherals 3 6 2 4 Acoustic noise output Less than 48 dB A at 20 degrees Celsius measured in the operators head position 20 cm in front of the keyboard s right corner at 1 30 m above the floor and in a distance of 1 meter at all four sides 1 meter ...

Страница 81: ...lable on site The voltage setting for the unit is found on a label on the back of the LOGIQ E9 on lower rear frame of the LOGIQ E9 3 6 3 2 Electrical specifications for LOGIQ E9 See Table 2 3 Electrical specifications for the LOGIQ E9 on page 2 3 for the electrical specifications for LOGIQ E9 include LCD and on board peripherals WARNING WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ E9 UNIT TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL...

Страница 82: ...ystem standard IEC60601 1 1 Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part of LOGIQ E9 configures a medical system and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of the valid version of IEC60601 1 1 If in doubt consult the technical service department or your local representative for GE Healthcare 3 6 4 1 Connect Ethernet Con...

Страница 83: ... DVI D Video output deliver a minimum of 1280x1024 60Hz 24 bit color depth 3 6 4 2 Connect USB Flash Drive Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual Chapter 3 Section 7 Figure 3 8 Audio 1 Ethernet 2 DVI I 3 and SVHS 4 connection for External Monitor on rear side of LOGIQ E9 R4 x and Later CAUTION To avoid breaking the back cover while opening it in order to connect up the net...

Страница 84: ...9s have two types of probe ports one non DLP probe port and three DLP probe ports Figure 3 10 R4 x and later LOGIQ E9s have one type of probe ports four DLP probe ports Figure 3 9 The non DLP probe port is compatible with the S1 5 S4 10 6Tc TEE probe and 3CRF probe connectors The three DLP probe ports are specific to the LOGIQ E9 probe connectors R4 x and later LOGIQ E9s have one type of probe por...

Страница 85: ... clockwise to the full vertical position to lock in place 6 Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor 3 6 6 3 Disconnect a probe 1 Select a different probe or Freeze the image before removing a probe in order to avoid disconnecting a live probe 2 Rotate the lock handle counter clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector 3 Remove the connector from the port 4 ...

Страница 86: ...wer ON Boot Up on page 4 3 DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR DANGER NEVER USE A THREE TO TWO PRONG ADAPTER THIS DEFEATS THE SAFETY GROUND DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL GRADE TYPE WHERE REQUIRED CAUTION LOGIQ E9 REQUIRES ALL COVERS OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL ...

Страница 87: ...d off 2 Uncoil the power cable allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly 3 Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage 4 Verify that the on site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit Breaker on the rear of the unit 5 Connect the Power Cable s female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the u...

Страница 88: ... down after a few seconds listen to the fan sound b Power is distributed to the peripherals Operator Panel Console Monitor Front End Processor and Back End Processor c Back End Processor and rest of the LOGIQ E9 starts with the sequence listed in the next steps d Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software e The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor f A start up bar indicati...

Страница 89: ...he AC Power to LOGIQ E9 cont d NOTE Total time used for start up is typically less than 170 seconds When using the sleep mode R2 x x or R3 x x start up time is less then 120 seconds If starting after a power loss or a lock up the start up time may be up to four minutes Figure 3 13 2D Screen on the display ...

Страница 90: ...er The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on If the Logoff button is dimmed it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment Shutdown Use this button to shut down the system The entire system will shut down It is recommended to perform a full shutdown at least once a week If the Shutdown button is dimmed press the ON OFF button or Alt F10 to shut down the unit Cancel...

Страница 91: ...r The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on If the Logoff button is dimmed it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment Shutdown Use this button to shut down the system The entire system will shut down It is recommended to perform a full shutdown at least once a week If the Shutdown button is dimmed press the ON OFF button or Alt F10 to shut down the unit Cancel ...

Страница 92: ... REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 3 28 Section 3 6 Completing the setup 3 6 9 Complete power down 1 Press once on the ON OFF button on the Operator Panel to display the System Exit menu Figure 3 16 Press once on the ON OFF button ...

Страница 93: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 29 3 6 9 Complete power down cont d Figure 3 17 System Exit menu R1 x x Figure 3 18 System Exit menu R2 x x and R3 x x ...

Страница 94: ...he time to turn down the unit including the Back End Processor may vary from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute The last thing that shuts down is the light on the Operator Panel indicating that you can continue with the next step 3 Switch off the Mains Power Circuit Breaker located on the rear of the unit This will cut power distribution within the unit Figure 3 19 System Exit Download menu R...

Страница 95: ...tem When you use Sleep Mode it only takes 90 seconds to start up the system versus 2 3 minutes To activate Sleep Mode press the ON OFF button and select Sleep Before returning a system to the customer perform the functional checks See Section 4 3 Functional checks on page 4 31 NOTICE For optimum system operation it is recommended that a full shutdown of the system is performed at least once every ...

Страница 96: ...ity Recording Miscellaneous settings on page 4 24 Set Dataflow see 4 2 11 6 Connectivity Recording Dataflow settings on page 4 22 Set Buttons see 4 2 11 7 Connectivity Recording the Print Key Assignments on page 4 23 Set up System Admin see 4 2 11 9 Admin Recording the Software Option Keys on page 4 26 Set up Users see 4 2 11 10 Admin Users on page 4 27 Set up Backup management see 4 2 11 11 Syste...

Страница 97: ...he LOGIQ E9 User Manual 4D Motor Controller Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options Manual Direction 5180288 100 Volume Navigation Refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E9 Options Manual Direction 5180409 100 WLAN Wireless LAN R2 x x or later Patient I O ECG Option R2 x x or later 3 7 3 2 Approved External Peripherals Optional The external printers are connected via Ethernet TCP...

Страница 98: ...This password is specific for each LOGIQ E9 Table 3 6 Peripheral Checks Step Task to do Notes 1 Press Freeze Stops image acquisition 2 Press Print 1 Print 2 Print 3 or Print 4 on the Control Panel Prints image displayed on the screen on Black and White or Color printer depending on the key assignment configuration 3 Press VIDEO icon on the Control Panel Brings up the DVR Touch Panel if the custome...

Страница 99: ...em Admin 2 Enter the new option key code in the SW Option Key section 3 Select the Add button Figure 3 20 System Admin screen R1 x x Add button Figure 3 21 System Admin screen R2 x x or later Add button CAUTION INCORRECT PASSWORD ENTRY WILL RESULT IN LOSS OF SYSTEM OPTIONS IF PASSWORD IS INCORRECT PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL GE SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE OR THE ONLINE CENTER ...

Страница 100: ... Option String can be imported from the media 5 Press Save to save the new setting 6 Restart to save and activate the settings and adjustments you have done so far Figure 3 22 Option Keys File in R5 and later Import Option keys file can be imported from There is an import button on the Utilities System Admin Preset Menu Media CD DVD USB Service Folder ...

Страница 101: ...eed a Crossover Cable for network use to connect the two units this way 1 Connect one end of the crossed network cable to the network connector on the LOGIQ E9 2 Connect the other end to the network connector to the Workstation see the Workstation Service Manual 3 8 1 3 2Connection via a Peer to Peer Network You will need a network switch and one network cable for each unit connected to the switch...

Страница 102: ... Network on page 3 41 Section 3 9 4 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Image Storage Service on page 3 42 3 9 1 Setup the LOGIQ E9 for DICOM Communications for R2 x x Software some features only apply to R3 x x Table 3 7 Utility Connectivity TCP IP screen 1 Enter the LOGIQ E9 computer name This may be the same as the station name 2 Enter the LOGIQ E9 IP address subnet mask default gateway and network sp...

Страница 103: ...puter 2 Assign an AE Title to the LOGIQ E9 AE stands for Application Entity DICOM services use this to identify the LOGIQ E9 AE Title is case sensitive This title may contain the Computer Name from the TCP IP page if desired NOTE It is NOT recommended to use the factory default This is not prohibited but more than one system with the same AE Title can cause confusion 3 Edit the Port Number if need...

Страница 104: ...1 Dataflow on page 3 49 A print button sends an image to the services assigned to it whenever pressed A print button also stores the image locally to the clipboard if Copy to Dataflow is assigned to it Send To in the Exam View tab sends an existing exam s images and other data to one service at a time See 3 Send To on page 3 49 Worklist and Query Retrieve services transfer data to the LOGIQ E9 See...

Страница 105: ...Add The system creates a device called NewDevice 2 Change the name to one of your choosing 3 Enter the IP address of the device Ping Smiley 4 Save your changes and then press Ping A Smiley Face indicates successful communication between your LOGIQ E9 and the device A Frown indicates failed communication Check the following Is the device running Is it connected to the network Did you enter the righ...

Страница 106: ...Tips 3 9 4 How to Setup and Use a DICOM Image Storage Service An Image Storage Service provides a place to store patient and exam data from the LOGIQ E9 and corresponding images The Image Storage Service or the device that hosts it is often called a Patient Archiving and Communication System PACS ...

Страница 107: ...LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 3 LOGIQ E9 Setup 3 43 3 9 4 1 Initial Steps To setup an Image Storage Service on the LOGIQ E9 follow these steps Table 3 10 Initial Steps Setup an Image Storage Service R3 x and earlier R4 x and later ...

Страница 108: ...own menu select DICOM Image Storage and press Add 3 Change the name of the service to one of your choosing 4 Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service AE Title is case sensitive 5 Save your changes and press Verify A Smiley Face indicates successful communication with the service NOTE If you get a successful Ping Smiley Face at the device level but not at the service level it is possible t...

Страница 109: ...he user presses it while scanning live it stores a single DICOM frame bitmap of the image along with the raw data of the image The raw data allows the system to treat this as a multi frame image cine clip because it can regenerate the multiple frames from the raw data when the situation calls for it One such situation is Allow Multiframe It instructs the LOGIQ E9 to generate a multi frame image to...

Страница 110: ...me Compression This compresses loops enhanced DICOM files prior to sending them to the service Compression This compresses image files prior to sending them to the service Compression takes time but saves time when the image is transferred Also storage space on the service is reduced with compression Set the compression type to one the service accepts Compression Formats NOTE Determine which compr...

Страница 111: ...n RGB format Mixed If the image area itself has color an image sent to the service will have color otherwise the image will be in shades of gray The Mixed setting sends images as is without conversion NOTE Color is recommended unless the user wants to reduce image storage size Then Mixed is suggested continued on next page Reopen Per Image The creates an association with the service prior to sendi...

Страница 112: ...ge Rejection indicates which images in a currently open exam should be deleted To use Image Rejection assign the service to a dataflow and check the Direct Store dataflow setting When the user scans with this dataflow in an exam deletes one or more images in the clipboard and ends the exam the sends a KIN DICOM object to the service This object lists the images to be rejected The service either de...

Страница 113: ...ng 3 Notice the list of available services to the left of the and buttons Select each DICOM service you want to attach to your dataflow and press This makes it appear in the list on the right indicating that the service is now assigned to the dataflow NOTE You cannot remove Local Archive Int HD from the dataflow This guarantees that images will be saved on the local Hard Disk Drive of the and not ...

Страница 114: ... keep in mind that the settings of the service will override the settings of the button for the images sent to the service Patient Page Dataflow Drop down Menu 6 Back on the Patient page select your dataflow from the drop down menu From that point on pressing your configured print button sends your images to the service s added to your dataflow NOTE Whenever you change the settings of a dataflow b...

Страница 115: ... for this purpose follow these steps Table 3 13 Print Button Setup 1 In Utility Connectivity Button select one of the Physical Print Buttons 2 Set Format Image Frames and Compression as desired See Table 3 14 Print Button Settings on page 3 52 3 Notice the list of available services to the left of the and buttons Select each DICOM service you want to assign to your print button and press If you do...

Страница 116: ...ap of the image Note that a raw data loop is still available if used with RawDicom This format captures the video area It allows measurements without calibration Multiple Stores multiple DICOM frames one bitmap for each frame Select this to either store multiple DICOM frames locally on the or to export cine loops to import elsewhere This option requires more disk space and takes longer to store im...

Страница 117: ... compression settings are different At the point the is to send an image generated by the print button to the service the will first un compress the compressed version of the print button and then recompress it using the settings of the service If the compression of the print button is lossy the un compression will not completely restore the original image Then applying the compression of the serv...

Страница 118: ...e Follow these steps Table 3 15 Send To 1 On the Patient screen select the desired patient In the Exam View tab select the exam to transfer 2 Press Send To 3 A pop up appears with a drop down menu Select any existing service to which images can be sent typically DICOM Image Storage and Print services Select the desired service and press OK 4 Press F4 to access the DICOM Job Spooler to can confirm ...

Страница 119: ...u have already setup the device in the Device tab 2 From the Select Service drop down menu select DICOM Print and press Add 3 Change the name of the service to one of your choosing 4 Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service AE Title is case sensitive 5 From the Vendor drop down menu select the vendor of the service printer The system adjusts some of the Properties of the printer according...

Страница 120: ...selected Top Annotation appears once at the top of each sheet whether one or more images are on the sheet Bottom Annotation appears once at the bottom of each sheet whether one or more images are on the sheet Per Image Annotation appears on each image c Format ID and Starting Position These are available only if the Vendor is Other Other settings and uses are beyond the scope of this document Refe...

Страница 121: ...Print Service is set to something other than 1x1 Then if the Print Service is tied either to a dataflow with Direct Store set or to a print button the will hold each image in its spooler until the number of images specified by Format is reached For example a Format of 3x4 specifies 12 images per sheet Until you press the print button 12 times the sends nothing to the Print Service If you press the...

Страница 122: ...our choosing 4 Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service AE Title is case sensitive 5 Maximum Retries Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image Storage Services See 3 9 4 2 Properties on page 3 45 6 Set Maximum Results to the maximum number of results returned The default and recommended setting is 100 7 Search Criteria are filters that restrict the entries returned ...

Страница 123: ...ies select Accession Number as the Search Key and enter 1 The list is filtered to display only those entries whose Accession Number starts with 1 Now enter 2 after the 1 The list is filtered again to display only those entries whose Accession Number starts with 12 Table 3 18 Remote versus Local Filtering Local Filtering Query Button NOT pressed Local filtering DOES NOT generate any DICOM traffic b...

Страница 124: ...f dates separated by a dash example 20140902 20141002 for the range September 2 2014 through October 2 2014 TODAY x y a range around today s date where x represents the number of days before today and y represents the number of days after today examples TODAY 0 0 means today only TODAY 1 3 means yesterday today and the three days after today A tag that represents a person s name such as 00100010 P...

Страница 125: ... example here are the rules for a valid AE Title Basically an AE Title can be up to 16 characters Leading and trailing spaces are ignored A title of all spaces is not valid These characters are not allowed line feed form feed carriage return and escape Table 3 20 Dicom Value Representations VR Name Definition Character Repertoire Length of Value AE Application Entity A string of characters that id...

Страница 126: ...a set in both the Utility Connectivity Service page and on this Worklist screen 4 To filter this list further enter more values in Patient ID Last Name etc This provides local filtering It DOES NOT generate more query requests to the Worklist service 5 Select one or more entries from the list and press Transfer The creates initial patient and exam data for each entry If you transferred a single en...

Страница 127: ...leted exams to the same system To set up MPPS on the follow these steps Table 3 22 Setup and Use a DICOM MPPS Utility Connectivity Service 1 In Utility Connectivity Service from the Destination Device drop down menu select your Worklist device 2 From the drop down menu of services select Dicom Performed Procedure and press Add 3 Provide a name set the AE Title and Port Number for your Worklist ser...

Страница 128: ...me dataflow that handles your DICOM Image Storage service To set up MPPS on the server end refer to the documentation of the Worklist service From this point on from the perspective of the user MPPS works quietly in the background It handles completed exams abandoned exams and empty exams with no input or monitoring required from the user Table 3 22 Setup and Use a DICOM MPPS ...

Страница 129: ...ervice Setup and Use 1 In Utility Connectivity Service from the Destination Device drop down menu select your Image Storage server 2 From the drop down menu of services select Dicom Storage Commitment and press Add 3 Provide a name set the AE Title and Port Number for your Image Storage service 4 Maximum Retries Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image Storage Services See ...

Страница 130: ...r of the Refer to the documentation of the Image Storage service for setting up Storage Commitment NOTE The Store Commit and its Associated Storage A MUST BE in the same Dataflow DICOM Job Spooler STC identified To confirm a successful Storage Commitment press F4 to inspect the spooler after you send images to the Image Storage service An entry of Type STC Contents Value equals the number of image...

Страница 131: ... interpret and display the data in the Structured Report Refer to the documentation of the Image Storage service documentation for Structured Reporting Table 3 24 Structured Reporting Utility Connectivity Service Enable Structured Reporting checked To enable Structured Reporting for an Image Storage service go to the set up screen for that service in Utility Connectivity Service check the Enable S...

Страница 132: ...torage service to the Printflow setting of that button and set the Format for that button to M A Take measurements in an exam and press the Print button The generates a Structured Report and sends it to the Image Storage service The does not store Structured Report files Instead when called upon it conveys the measurements and calculations to the service via the DICOM message exchange between them...

Страница 133: ...trieve and press Add 3 Change the name of the service to one of your choosing 4 Enter the AE Title and Port Number of the service AE Title is case sensitive 5 Maximum Retries Retry Interval and Timeout have the same use as with DICOM Image Storage Services See 3 9 4 2 Properties on page 3 45 6 Set Maximum Results to the maximum number of results returned 7 Search Criteria are essentially the same ...

Страница 134: ...ts and their exams and stores them on its local hard drive These patients are available on the patient screen You can view their exams and images and create new exams for them Each patient entry in the list indicates the number of series exams available for retrieval 5a To retrieve all of them double click anywhere in the row or single click the row and press the Transfer button To retrieve indivi...

Страница 135: ...lities in Study to retrieve non US images To filter on more than one modality separate each by a backslash For example US MR CT PT XA MG returns entries for all modalities supported by the Basic Use with V Nav This guide is not intended to cover V Nav extensively However here are the initial steps Table 3 27 Q R Support for Volume Navigation Image History Display 1 Query and retrieve the non US st...

Страница 136: ...cted and displays the non US volume on the right side of the screen 7 To scroll through the dataset press the Scroll Z Trackball button Use the Trackball to scroll through the dataset to find the area of interest 8 When done press Scroll Z again You are now scanning live on the left side of the screen with your reference view on the right screen Table 3 27 Q R Support for Volume Navigation ...

Страница 137: ...ation may contain general information The buttons in the DICOM JOB SPOOLER display Refresh Refresh the status of jobs on the spooler Delete Select one or more jobs on the spooler and press Delete to delete them A pop up asks you to confirm your choice Successful jobs get deleted automatically after several minutes Resend Select a single job and press Resend to send it to its original destination I...

Страница 138: ...s indicates an issue with the image or patient data such as a missing Patient ID The remote service is out of resources For example the PACS has no more storage space 3 9 4 11 Wireless Configuring a Wireless network is beyond the scope of this guide Both the User and Service manuals cover Wireless setup in detail In particular for setting up the WLAN refer to the appropriate version the Basic User...

Страница 139: ...t can be saved in files It is useful for debugging connectivity issues Usually only DICOM traffic is Follow these steps Table 3 30 Network Sniffer Wireshark Capture Interfaces 1 Press Alt N to display Wireshark 2 In Capture Interfaces press Options on the interface that corresponds to the IP address Wireshark Capture Options 3 Make sure Capture packets in promiscuous mode is unchecked Press Start ...

Страница 140: ... Apply Once Wireshark displays DICOM traffic select an individual line and expand the DICOM tree in the lower frame to view DICOM specific data Wireshark Info column Capture Restart clears the current traffic display in preparation for the next DICOM exchange In the Wireshark Info column entries with Reject or Abort definitely indicate issues For example the above exchange occurred when the tried ...

Страница 141: ...ften encoded in innocuous looking entries near the end of the exchange For example the above situation involved the attempting to send an image to Viewpoint directly via a print button without a patient id Viewpoint s C STORE RSP message to the indicated by an encoded value in the Status tag that it did not store the image continued on next page Table 3 30 Network Sniffer ...

Страница 142: ...ffic currently displayed stop the capture and press File Save As In the pop up select a destination drive or folder name the file select both All packets and Displayed under Packet Range and press Save This saves the DICOM traffic in a file with suffix pcap which can be analyzed by Wireshark or a similar network sniffer Table 3 30 Network Sniffer ...

Страница 143: ...IP CODE DESTINATION NAME AND ADDRESS 46 303268P1 Rev 14 L A I R E S V E R L E D O M A D F N O I T P I R C S E D OCP BS ORD R Y A D O M E T A D M O O R T C I R T S I D ZIP CODE DESTINATION NAME AND ADDRESS CUSTOMER NO SYSTEM LTD EMPLOYEE NO g g Mailing Address GIB European Central Admin Product Locator Cards VÀKUUMTECHNOLÒGIAI GÈPGYÀR FÒTI ÙT 141 GEHC Americas Product Locator W523 P O Box 414 Milwa...

Страница 144: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 3 80 Section 3 10 Setup paperwork This page was intentionally left blank ...

Страница 145: ... checking major functions of the LOGIQ E9 scanner and diagnostics instructions using the built in service software 4 1 2 Special Equipment required An empty blank DVD R disk At least one probe ideally you should check all the site probes used by the system For available probes see Section 9 18 Probes on page 9 104 ECG Harness CABLE ECG MARQ AHA AMERICA P N 164L0025 LEADWIRES ECG MARQ AHA AMERICA P...

Страница 146: ... Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCO...

Страница 147: ...POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR DANGER NEVER USE A THREE TO TWO PRONG ADAPTER THIS DEFEATS THE SAFETY GROUND DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL GRADE TYPE WHERE REQUIRED CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE SECURELY IN PLACE THE COVERS ARE REQU...

Страница 148: ...2 Uncoil the power cable allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly 3 Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage 4 Verify that the on site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit Breaker on the rear of the unit 5 Connect the Power Cable s female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit 6 ...

Страница 149: ...sound b Power is distributed to the peripherals Operator Panel Console Monitor Front End Processor and Back End Processor c Back End Processor and rest of scanner starts with the sequence listed in the next steps d Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software e The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor f A start up bar indicating the time used for software loading is displaye...

Страница 150: ...Section 4 2 General procedures 4 2 2 3 Turn Unit ON cont d NOTE Total time used for start up is typically one and a half minutes or less If starting after a power loss or a lock up the start up time may be up to four minutes Figure 4 3 2D Screen on the display ...

Страница 151: ...off the current user The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on If the Logoff button is dimmed it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment Shutdown Use this button to shut down the system The entire system will shut down It is recommended to perform a full shutdown at least once a week If the Shutdown button is dimmed to shut down the unit Cancel Use this button ...

Страница 152: ...educe the boot up time is less than 120 seconds Intended to help on portable studies Sleep saves all Memory content in the Hard drive and shuts down When booting up memory content is restored from HDD This feature is not a substitute of a regular shutdown The system should be shutdown completely at least once a day to prevent performance issues Figure 4 5 Sleep Mode ...

Страница 153: ...r activity and print the message Please wait Shutdown in progress in the LCD display on the Operator Panel Next it starts to shut down itself The time to shutdown the LOGIQ E9 including the Back End Processor may vary from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute The last thing that shuts down is the light on the Operator Panel indicating that you can continue with the next step NOTE Sleep Mode onl...

Страница 154: ... the Lock and brake release button s Figure 4 6 button 1 and pull the Top Console out of the locked position until the Top console is in the desired position 2 Release the button s 4 2 4 2 To lock the Top Console 1 Press and hold down the Lock and brake release button s Figure 4 6 button 1 while pushing the Top Console in the locked position 2 Release the button s 4 2 4 3 To move the floating Top ...

Страница 155: ... left right horizontally NOTE The LCD Monitor can move approximately 100 mm 3 94 inches vertically and 250 mm 9 84 inches horizontally Figure 4 7 LCD Monitor Position and Lock R3 x and earlier 1 Unlocked LCD Monitor 2 Locked LCD Monitor Figure 4 8 LCD Monitor Positions R4 x 1 Tilt LCD Monitor 3 Move Monitor Up and Down 2 Move Monitor Back and Forth 4 Monitor front view Monitor tilted down side vie...

Страница 156: ...left right horizontally NOTE The LCD Monitor can move approximately 100 mm 3 94 inches vertically and 250 mm 9 84 inches horizontally Figure 4 9 LCD Monitor Positions R5 x 1 Vertical Travel 150mm 4 Pan Arm Rotation 45º 90º total 2 Rotation at Mount 90º 180º total 5 LCD Translation 350mm 3 Lift Arm Rotation 135º 270º total 6 Tilt a No Collistion b Approximately 20º based on Pan Arm Off set c 85º 90...

Страница 157: ...clockwise to unlock the LCD Monitor The LCD Monitor can be moved freely in all directions 4 2 5 2 To lock the LCD Monitor Turn the knob clockwise to raise the lock and move the LCD Monitor into the parked position 4 2 5 3 LCD Monitor position for Transport Lock Arm and tilt LCD Monitor down Figure 4 10 LCD Monitor transport Position R4 x shown ...

Страница 158: ...ormation refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual Chapter 16 4 2 8 Space Management Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual Chapter 16 to perform the following tasks Configuring the Disk Management Function Setting the Disk Management Schedule Configuring Data Management Settings Configuring Destination Device Setting Running the Disk Management...

Страница 159: ...ivel lock 4 2 10 2 To prepare the LOGIQ E9 to be moved 1 If not locked move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position see 4 2 4 Top Console position adjustment on page 4 10 and 4 2 5 LCD Monitor Positions and Lock on page 4 11 2 Turn the system off including the circuit breaker see 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 and remove the plug from the wall 3 Disconnect all cables linking t...

Страница 160: ...rd console and LCD monitor to the park position see 4 2 4 Top Console position adjustment on page 4 10 and 4 2 5 LCD Monitor Positions and Lock on page 4 11 2 Disconnect all probes and secure them in their boxes 3 Ensure that the transporting vehicle is appropriate for the unit s weight 4 Park the vehicle on a level surface for loading and unloading 5 Secure the unit while it is on the lift to pre...

Страница 161: ...py forms are provided here for convenience but content will be included if selected during Backup process Utility Connectivity 4 2 11 5 Connectivity Recording Device Destination settings on page 4 21Service see 4 2 11 5 Connectivity Recording Device Destination settings on page 4 21 Dataflow see 4 2 11 6 Connectivity Recording Dataflow settings on page 4 22 Buttons see 4 2 11 7 Connectivity Record...

Страница 162: ...e TCP IP settings 1 From the Touch Panel select Utility Connectivity TCP IP 2 Record all settings in Table 4 2 Record settings from TCP IP screen on page 4 18 Figure 4 12 TCP IP settings Table 4 2 Record settings from TCP IP screen PARAMETER VALUE COMPUTER NAME IP SETTINGS IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK DEFAULT GATEWAY NETWORK SPEED ...

Страница 163: ...ectivity WLAN 2 Record all settings in Table 4 3 Record settings from WLAN screen on page 4 19 Figure 4 13 WLAN settings Table 4 3 Record settings from WLAN screen PARAMETER VALUE NETWORK NAME SSID NETWORK AUTHENTICATION DATA ENCRYPTION NETWORK KEY KEY INDEX Specify Yes No to The Key is Provided Automatically IEEE 802 1x AUTHENTICATION INFORMATION EAP TYPE ...

Страница 164: ...Devices if not already selected 3 Record all settings in Table 4 4 Record settings for My Computer from Device screen on page 4 20 4 Record all settings in Table 4 5 Record settings for each device listed in Device table on page 4 20 Figure 4 14 Device settings Table 4 4 Record settings for My Computer from Device screen PARAMETER VALUE AE TITLE PORT NO MACC ADDRESS Table 4 5 Record settings for e...

Страница 165: ...ng Device Destination settings 1 From the Touch Panel select Utility Connectivity Service 2 Record all settings in Table 4 6 Record settings from Service screen on page 4 21 for each Destination Device and Service Figure 4 15 Service settings Table 4 6 Record settings from Service screen DESTINATION DEVICE PROPERTIES ...

Страница 166: ...g Dataflow settings 1 From the Touch Panel select Utility Connectivity Dataflow 2 Record all settings in Table 4 7 Record settings from Service screen on page 4 22 Figure 4 16 Dataflow settings Table 4 7 Record settings from Service screen DESTINATION DEVICE NAME SERVICES TYPES FOR EACH DESTINATION DEVICE PROPERTIES NAME ...

Страница 167: ...gnments 1 From the Touch Panel select Utility Connectivity Buttons 2 Record all settings in Table 4 8 Record settings from Button screen on page 4 23 Figure 4 17 Button settings Table 4 8 Record settings from Button screen PARAMETER FORMAT IMAGE FRAMES COMPRESSION COMPRESSION QUALITY PRINTFLOW VIEW PRINT1 PRINT2 PRINT3 PRINT4 PRINTSCREEN ...

Страница 168: ... 4 2 General procedures 4 2 11 8 Connectivity Recording Miscellaneous settings 1 From the Touch Panel select Utility Connectivity Miscellaneous 2 Record all settings in Table 4 9 Record settings from Miscellaneous screen on page 4 25 Figure 4 18 Miscellaneous settings ...

Страница 169: ...apture Area Worklist Auto Query Store 2D B Mode Loop with Timeline Data Show BBT Patient List Print Font Size Double click on patient list to start DICOM Multi frame image resolution Detail Mode Show progress bar while storing image Export to USB HDD Create DICOMDIR Image Order Scheme Automatic Disable Patient Data Columns in examination listing Remember cursor position on Transfer Screen Enable O...

Страница 170: ...Installed Option Keys field in Table 4 10 Software Option Keys on page 4 26 Figure 4 19 System Admin settings WARNING WARNING Make sure that the Software Option Keys alphanumeric passwords have been recorded correctly If the key is incorrect you will not be able to log on after the SW installation has been completed The password is case sensitive Hyphens must also be recorded There may be more tha...

Страница 171: ... 11 10 Admin Users 1 From the Touch Panel select Utility Admin System Admin 2 Record all settings in Table 4 11 Record settings from Users screen on page 4 27 Figure 4 20 Users settings Table 4 11 Record settings from Users screen USER ID PREFIX LAST NAME FIRST NAME GROUP MEMBERSHIP OP RIGHTS ...

Страница 172: ...anagement 1 Select Utility System Backup Restore 2 Record all settings in Table 4 12 Record settings from Backup Restore screen on page 4 28 Figure 4 21 Backup Restore settings Table 4 12 Record settings from Backup Restore screen MOVE FILES OLDER THAN IN DAYS REMINDER DIALOG INTERVAL DAYS MEDIA CAPACITY EZMove EZBackup ...

Страница 173: ...ideo Settings Format DVR model and Network printer model in Table 4 13 Record settings from Peripheral screen on page 4 29 Figure 4 22 Peripherals settings Table 4 13 Record settings from Peripheral screen PARAMETER VALUE VIDEO SETTINGS FORMAT ___PAL ___NTSC DVR PICTURE QUALITY MIC LEVEL STANDARD PRINTER DEFAULT PRINTER SETUP ERASE VIDEO DATA AFTER BURNING IS COMPLETE not pictured ...

Страница 174: ...h Panel select Utility System About 2 Record software and hardware versions in Table 4 14 Record Software and Hardware versions on page 4 30 Figure 4 23 Hardware Software information Table 4 14 Record Software and Hardware versions DESCRIPTION RECORD VERSIONS APPLICATION SW VERSION APPLICATION SW PART NUMBER SYSTEM SW VERSION IMAGE REV SYSTEM SW IMAGE PART NUMBER ...

Страница 175: ...ns can be assigned to the trackball depending of the current active mode The Trackball area consist of The Trackball used as a cursor control in acquisition mode scrolling control in freeze and as a selection tool like a mouse cursor in post processing mode Three SELECT keys identical Perform the selected control or highlighted menu item The TRACKBALL key Toggles between the available trackball fu...

Страница 176: ...not required It is the most current phantom optional recommended to our field service personnel and provides the necessary targets and extended life necessary for consistent system testing Figure 4 24 Performance tests 2 4 3 2 1 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 RMI 403GS Lateral Distance Measurement Functional Resolution Contrast Resolution Gray Scale Photography Lateral Resolution Axial Resolution Axial Distanc...

Страница 177: ...urance Evaluations Quality Assurance tests are used to determine whether a scanner is providing the same level of performance year after year By using the same settings year after year this ensures that the data collection is consistent independently of who performs the test This preset only includes fundamental settings for B Mode Processing modes like SRI Harmonics etc are turned off To do an Im...

Страница 178: ...Depth to adjust the range to be imaged Use Focus to center the focal point s around the region of interest Use Frequency move to higher frequencies or Frame rate move to lower frame rate to increase resolution in image Use Frequency move to lower frequency to increase penetration Use the control to optimize imaging in the blood flow regions and make a cleaner less noisy image Use Reject controls t...

Страница 179: ... Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast Focus Number and Position Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone s so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific area A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position s appears on the right edge of the image Rejection Selects a level below wh...

Страница 180: ...bes on page 3 20 for info about connecting the probes For available probes see Section 9 18 Probes on page 9 104 2 Turn ON the scanner 4 3 7 3 Color Mode Checks Color Flow screens are B or M Mode screens with colors representing blood or tissue movement Color Flow may be selected both from B Mode or from M mode or a combination of these For information refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ...

Страница 181: ... Mode controls Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the spectral Doppler area Adjust Low velocity reject to reduce unwanted low velocity blood flow and tissue movement In PW mode adjust Sample volume to low setting for better resolution or higher setting to more easily locate the disturbed flows Adjust the Compress setting to balance the effect of stronger and weaker echoes and obtain th...

Страница 182: ...a to be examined 6 Press Select The instruction Size should be highlighted in the trackball status bar NOTE If the trackball control pointer is selected press trackball key to be able to select between Position and Size controls 7 Use the trackball to adjust the dimension of the ROI 4 3 8 3 Adjust the TVI Controls To reduce quantification noise variance the Nyquist limit should be as low as possib...

Страница 183: ...point tissue depth 3 Press Set to fix the start point 4 The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper 5 Move the TRACKBALL to position the second active caliper at the end point distance or the most posterior point tissue depth 6 Press Set to complete the measurement The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window NOTE Before you c...

Страница 184: ...the size turn the Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction 9 To toggle between active calipers press Measure 10 Press Set to complete the measurement 11 The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window NOTE Before you complete a measurement To erase the ellipse and the current data measured press Clear once The original caliper is displayed to restart the mea...

Страница 185: ...rmation refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual Chapter 5 4 3 13 Software Configuration Checks Table 4 16 Software Configuration Checks Step Task to do Notes 1 Verify Date and Time is correct 2 Verify that Location Hospital Name is correct 3 Verify Language settings are correct 4 Verify assignment of Printer Keys 5 Verify all of the customer s options are set up correctl...

Страница 186: ...You should then see the line Plug in the ECG cables with nothing attached so you pick up noise the line should display noise CAUTION TAKE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WITH THE PROBE CABLES KEEP AWAY FROM THE WHEELS DO NOT BEND DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES Table 4 17 Probe and Connectors Checks Step Task Expected Result s 1 Select the appropriate connected probe from the probe indicators on the ...

Страница 187: ...6 4 To Move Quickly to Start End Frame 1 Press First to move to the first CINE frame 2 Press Last to move to the last CINE frame 4 3 16 5 To Start Frame End Frame 1 Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop Turn the dial to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop 2 Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop Turn the dial t...

Страница 188: ...4 3 Functional checks 4 3 17 Back End Processor checks If all the previous tests have been passed successfully the Back End Processor is most likely OK See Service Platform If the system seems to be operating erratically refer to Diagnostics Troubleshooting on page 7 1 ...

Страница 189: ...Lock Checks Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below Table 4 18 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Press the left pedal 1 this Releases the brake and engages the locked wheel direction You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked direction 2 Press the right pedal 2 this Engages the brakes in full ...

Страница 190: ...eft Middle Right switches 3 Program them all for Freeze 4 Then Scan and use each pedal to freeze and unfreeze to be sure each works 4 3 18 6 WLAN R2 x x or R3 x x see 8 6 8 3 WLAN Set up and Check on page 8 164 R4 x x or later see 8 11 23 3 WLAN Set up on page 8 530 Table 4 19 19 LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks Step Task Note s 1 Tilt Forward Back Use both hands one at the top of the L...

Страница 191: ...ecks Section 4 5 Power supply test and adjustments 4 5 1 Power Supply Test Procedure Run the System Voltage test Refer to 7 5 12 4 System on page 7 70 Table 4 20 Software Configuration Checks STEP TASK CHECK 1 Check Date and Time setting 2 Check that Location Hospital Name Department is correct 3 Check Language settings 4 Check assignment of Printer Keys P1 P2 P3 P4 5 Check that all of the custome...

Страница 192: ...tial Accuracy on page 6 31 Section 4 7 SWAVE Shear Wave Shear Elasto Functional Check If the Capacitor Pack is not present or the Power Supply to Capacitor Pack Cable is not connected or connected properly the option to select the Shear Elasto soft button after pressing the Elasto button the Touch Panel key Shear Elasto strain Elasto button WILL NOT be present Select a probe 9L D and C1 6D Select ...

Страница 193: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 49 Section 4 8 Site Log Table 4 21 Site Log DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS ...

Страница 194: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 4 50 Section 4 8 Site Log Table 4 21 Site Log Continued DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS ...

Страница 195: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 51 Table 4 21 Site Log Continued DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS ...

Страница 196: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 4 52 Section 4 8 Site Log Table 4 21 Site Log Continued DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS ...

Страница 197: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 53 Table 4 21 Site Log Continued DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS ...

Страница 198: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 4 54 Section 4 8 Site Log This page was intentionally left blank ...

Страница 199: ...gurations and Hardware Software Compatibility Upgrade Options CONSOLE MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION Phase I BT2010 BT2011 R4 R5 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 2 0 3 2 0 4 2 0 5 3 1 2 3 1 3 4 Rev x x 5 Rev x x 5205000 LOGIQ E9 00 240 VAC Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U 5205000 3 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC N N N N Y Y Y U U U U 5205000 4 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC...

Страница 200: ...ction cont d LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations Key Front End Processor see 9 12 2 Front End Boards Compatible Configurations on page 9 61 Back End Processor see 9 13 1 Back End Boards Compatible Configurations on page 9 73 LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations Key Y Original U Upgrade available N Not supported ...

Страница 201: ... 5 2 2 Introduction The LOGIQ E9 ultrasound system is a high performance digital ultrasound imaging system with total data management The LOGIQ E9 provides image generation in B Mode Color Doppler Power Doppler M Mode PW 4D Harmonic Imaging and Contrast imaging applications The fully digital architecture of the LOGIQ E9 ultrasound system allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe types t...

Страница 202: ...X64 GRX128 CW 0 Note supported on R2 x x and later GTX 3 Transmitter Boards 64 channels each in this configuration Note some illustrations show that there are four boards this is for illustration purposes only DRX 3 Digital Receiver Boards 64 channels each in this configuration Note some illustrations show that there are four boards this is for illustration purposes only GFI 1 Back End Processor B...

Страница 203: ...sed C GA200334 FROG BRAKE ARM 2 used D 5272357 2 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY D1 5269862 MAIN CABLE POWER AUDIO D2 5262473 2 MAIN CABLE VIDEO D3 5265371 MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS D4 5248609 MAIN CABLE USB 2 used E 5196889 VIDEO HDMI CABLE LCD F 5196890 POWER USB CABLE LCD G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD 2 used H 5194492 USB CABLE MAIN POWER SUPPLY I 5194495 POWER CABLE BEP 48V J 5152290 PCI EXPRESS ...

Страница 204: ...tor Console Assembly with LCD Monitor Upper Operator Panel Assembly Lower Operator Panel Assembly Bulkhead Gel Warmer Optional which can be placed on the left or right hand side of the console TV Probe Holder Optional which can be placed on the left or right hand side of the console XYZ Controller Assembly Z Axis Motor Assembly Table 5 2 New Card Rack configuration for MRX New Part Replaces Commen...

Страница 205: ...EXPRESS CABLE OMTTED J 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE OMTTED K 5266407 POWER CABLE DVD L 5194492 6 USB CABLE XYZ CONTROLLER M 5270048 SATA CABLE DVD N 5194491 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE CABLE OMTTED N 5194491 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE CABLE OMTTED Na 5372764 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE AND PCI EXPRESS CABLE Na 5372764 BEP TO CARD RACK BACKPLANE AND PCI EXPRESS CABLE P 5194498 AUDIO CABLE SUBWOOFER Q 51...

Страница 206: ...POWER BB 5194492 4 USB CABLE 4D CONTROLLER EXTERNAL CABLES AND HARNESSES BEP ASSEMBLY CABLES AND HARNESSES B J1 J46 T U D3 48V 5V POWER P7 P8 P1 P2 P3 P4 D4 J24 J22 J21 J25 J23 J18 J19 J15 J1 P5 P6 L 5V FROM J21 4D MOTOR CNTRL H BRIDGE DC DC CONVERTERS POWER FACTOR CORRECTION ISOLATION AND DC HEAD CONTROL S 120VAC INVERTER USB POWER CHARGEBOARD 12V BATTERY 12V BATTERY CHARGER 48V 5vDUAL AC FAIL D1...

Страница 207: ... BATTERY 12V BATTERY CHARGER 48V 5vDUAL AC FAIL D1 20A 5V FLAT SCREEN 12V HV INV USB HUB USB AUDIO MIC 5V 48V 5V REG 12V USB VIDEO CNTL E L OPTION KEY J7 J28 J100 USB Micro Controller IO Ports VPD DVI D FET 5V CODEC 12V AUDIO AMP USB PWR ENABLE OC DETECT USB H3 USB H4 USB 0 SATA 3 SATA 2 TO DVR DIGITAL AUDIO FUTURE 3 3V 5V 5V STBY 5V 12V 48V 28V BATT LAN CTRL USB 13 USB 1 USB 2 USB 3 USB 4 USB 5 U...

Страница 208: ...these signals Then the signals are routed to the DRX board s where the signals are A D converted The digital signals are then further processed on the DRX boards Figure 5 5 LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow GFI Configuration 192 GRLY 128 192 CW Option TGC T R 192 R e l a y s 192 192 192 GRX 128 GRX 64 Frontplane GTX 64 Ch GTX 64 Ch GTX 64 Ch GDIF David 1 David 2 Pulser David 3 Pulser David 0 DRX 64 Ch DRX 64 D...

Страница 209: ...oard amplifies the ultrasound signal and connects it with an A D converter to the digital domain The digital signals are then further processed on the MRX boards Figure 5 6 LOGIQ E9 Signal Flow MRX GTX 64 Ch GTX 64 Ch GTX 64 Ch 256 256 MRX Frontplane GRLY 256 R e l a y s 192 192 192 GDIF David 1 David 2 Pulser David 3 Pulser David 0 T R A D A DA Nathan 32 Ch TGC TGC TGC TGC TGC X Nathan 32 Ch Nath...

Страница 210: ...when accurate timing information is required M mode is also known as T M mode or time motion mode Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display M mode displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam Depth is arranged along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis M mode is normally used in con...

Страница 211: ...moving reflectors in the sample volume PW Doppler can be used alone but is normally used in conjunction with a 2D B Mode B Mode image with an M line and sample volume marker superimposed on the 2 D image indicating the position of the Doppler sample volume The sample volume size and location are specified by the operator Sample volume can be overlaid by a flow direction cursor which is aligned by ...

Страница 212: ...que for 4D image presentation is to combine the 2D B Mode cross sections into an image which represents how the volume of the data would appear from a particular viewing direction The mathematics behind this feature is called 4D rendering Such combined images are called projections because the data from the volume is projected onto a flat 2 dimensional surface e g the ultrasound system display Thi...

Страница 213: ...ovide a smooth presentation when displayed With Elastography active the image will show a color map bar indicating the level of elasticity detected by the system The Elastography image is achieved by pulsating the probe manually while you are scanning the anatomy of interest 5 2 8 9 1 ShearWave With the Shear Wave option the scanner creates the distortion by generating shear waves in tissue using ...

Страница 214: ...ion The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of LOGIQ E9 s Top Console and to tell you how it function 5 3 2 Transporting LOGIQ E9 The Top Console must be locked into the lower center X Y position before transporting the LOGIQ E9 The LCD Monitor must be in its flipped down position And the rear wheel brake must be set Refer to the Basic User Manual Direction 5180374 100 for more info...

Страница 215: ...est of the LOGIQ E9 The Top Console can be moved up down Z axis sideways to the left and to the right X axis and back and forth Y axis The XYZ Mechanism is commonly referred to as the frogleg The up down movement of the console is motor driven The control buttons for the electrical motor are centered between the handles A gas spring inside the LOGIQ E9 counterbalances the Z axis vertical movement ...

Страница 216: ...ric keyboard and frogleg controls 1 Probe and Cord Holder 2 USB Ports 2 3 Measurement Selection Menu and Joystick controls 4 Keyboard 5 Feature Keys Elastography Volume Navigation Loop View Contrast 6 Modes B M CF PDI PW CW TVi Gain XYZ Controls for 3D 4D Mode 7 TGC 8 Trackball Trackball Keys Pointer Measure Comment Body Pattern Clear Zoom 3D 4D P1 See Figure 5 9 Customer Removable Trackball on pa...

Страница 217: ...Operator Panel general description cont d Customer Removable Trackball introduced for forward production in R4 A new Bezel was introduced with different dimensions around the Trackball and Trackball Keys to fit the Removable Trackball Trackball Keys are slightly narrower Figure 5 9 Customer Removable Trackball ...

Страница 218: ...Y LVDS XMTR C TOUCH SCREEN HV INVERTER ENABLE AUX USB PCB AUX USB PORT 1 USB KEYBRD CONTROLLER A N KEYBOARD MATRIX A N KEYBOARD BACKLIGHT LED MATRIX AMB AMB FET SLIDE POTS A D CONV MUX 12V J3 J6 KEYBRD CONTROLLER ENCODERS X12 CH A B BUFFER CH A B BUFFER CH A B BUFFER QUAD DETECT QUAD DETECT QUAD DETECT BUTTON MATRIX CHIP SELECT 12 5 3 3V MODE CLK 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 5V E AMBER LED MATRIX GREEN LED...

Страница 219: ... printer DVD Recorder card in BEP Option DVD player Power Supply Main Power 4D Motor Controller Option Volume Navigation Option Lifting mechanism for the Frog Leg and Top Console Rear handle Front and Rear Casters with lock and brake mechanism The Main Console consists of a frame that acts as the skeleton of the LOGIQ E9 The other parts listed above are mounted to the frame The outside of the Main...

Страница 220: ...ated at the bottom of the LOGIQ E9 5 5 2 Location in the LOGIQ E9 There are two filters One located on the rear of the LOGIQ E9 and one located beneath the air cooling fans at the bottom of the LOGIQ E9 Refer to Chapter 8 for more information Section 5 6 Casters and Brakes description The front brake is used for everyday use the back brake is ONLY used to transport the LOGIQ E9 Refer to Chapter 8 ...

Страница 221: ...l description The Main Power Supply s main task is to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System and to supply the various internal subsystems with AC or DC power Figure 5 12 Main Power Supply MLP Line Filter Rectifier Inrush Current Limier PFC Stand By 5Vstb 12W 24V 24V 48V 48V 15V 12V 6V TLP 0 95V 0 95V 2X20W IEC60601 1 Isolation 400V 90 250Vac 0 140V 0 140V 130W Invert...

Страница 222: ... reduce the peak input current when the LOGIQ E9 is switched on An EMI filter helps to reduce EMI to acceptable levels The mains cord has plugs in both ends A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the wall outlet Fuses are located inside the power supply only to be replaced by the manufacturer Figure 5 13 Power Supply Block Diagram R4 and earlier MAIN POWER SUPPLY TO PRINTERS H A ...

Страница 223: ... the peak input current when the LOGIQ E9 is switched on An EMI filter helps to reduce EMI to acceptable levels The mains cord has plugs in both ends A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the wall outlet Fuses are located inside the power supply only to be replaced by the manufacturer Figure 5 14 Power Supply Block Diagram R5 and later MAIN POWER SUPPLY TO PRINTERS H A I 4D MOTO...

Страница 224: ...wer Supply is equipped with an internal fan with variable speed for temperature control Both the temperature of the air entering the power supply and leaving the power supply are measured Fan speed is controlled by the power supply 5 7 2 3 Input Mains Power 100 VAC or 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Figure 5 15 Main Power Supply Figure 5 16 L1 Mains IN connector MAIN POWER SUPPLY ...

Страница 225: ...wer supply powers up 24V 15V 6V 11V 5 Main Power supply provides 48V_OK as soon as 48V is within specification 6 BEP Power supply Provides PC voltages from 48V 7 BEP enumerates PCI note that GFI DSP or MRX DSP and PCI Express bridge must be powered before BEP enumerates PCI 8 BEP application software controls 24V 15V 6V 11V via USB RackPower 0x6A 9 BEP application software controls TSV1and TSV2 vi...

Страница 226: ...n TSV1 and TSV2 SetTxPS 0x68 5 Controller turns OFF PMX voltages 6 BEP via USB commands Power Supply to shutdown card rack RackPower 0x6A 7 BEP OS performs shutdown 8 BEP sends PSON_N high to Power Supply 9 Controller turns OFF TS voltages 10 Controller TS_OK output signal goes low 11 Controller turns OFF PMX voltages 12 Controller turns OFF voltages 15 6 11V 24V 13 Controller turns OFF 48V 14 Con...

Страница 227: ...ng a diagnostic ultrasound transducer Shear waves push the tissue at a low frequency in either a single burst of high amplitude long duration pulses or a series of such pulses Where is it used Because elasticity stiffness viscosity and a number of other Properties of certain tissue types change with disease states there is a clinical need of a quantitative method for assessing elasticity of tissue...

Страница 228: ...th raw data and DICOM format In order to support the Shear Wave functionality the Main Power Supply and the GTX Boards have been modified GTX Boards A new version of the GTX Boards GTX 2 4 has been introduced in R5 to support Shear Wave The new GTX Boards ARE NOT backwards compatible Main Power Supply The Capacitor Pack Module is added and connected to the HV outputs of the Power Supply to support...

Страница 229: ...rd with Hi Pass connection Card Cage Front Cover to access the GRLY Cable from GRLY to DriveBay2 EE Some of them are already present in the standard console depending upon the console vintage Figure 5 20 V Nav Inside Option Block Diagram BAYBIRD VGU OPTION CW PROBE CONNECTION BT2010 OPTION S USB POWER RELAY MRX GTX GTX GTX PD BACKPLANE A BSCAN PCI EXPRESS 4D MOTOR DRIVE CARD RACK 5V VPD I2C METAL ...

Страница 230: ...GIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 5 32 Section 5 7 Power distribution 5 7 6 V Nav Inside Option cont d Figure 5 21 V Nav Inside Option HDMI Auxiliary Sensor Input from GRLY Figure 5 22 V Nav Inside Option Cable from GRLY to Auxiliary Sensor Input ...

Страница 231: ...nents and Functions Theory 5 33 Section 5 8 Power Loss description Section 5 9 Cables for LOGIQ E9 Please refer to Section 9 16 Mains Power Cables on page 9 84 Section 9 17 Internal Cables on page 9 86 Section 5 10 Probes description See Section 9 18 Probes on page 9 104 ...

Страница 232: ...M DD YYYY format throughout the manual Information on how to change the LOGIQ E9 s date can be found in Customizing Your System Chapter 16 in the LOGIQ E9 User Manual User Guide 5 11 1 User documentation LOGIQ E9 User Manual User Guide LOGIQ E9 Advanced Reference Manual Release Notes eDOCs CD contains all user manuals and translations and the Basic Service Manual 5 11 2 Service documentation LOGIQ...

Страница 233: ...ents 6 1 Chapter 6 Service Adjustments Section 6 1 Overview 6 1 1 Purpose of this chapter This section describes how to adjust the scanner Section 6 2 LCD Monitor adjustments 6 2 1 Purpose of this section This section describes how to adjust the LCD monitor for optimal performance ...

Страница 234: ... no need for any further adjustments Under special light conditions you may want to adjust the LCD screen s backlight intensity Factory default Intensity is 100 For complete information refer to the of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual Chapter 16 for R3 x x To obtain different test patterns for B W or color adjustments press Utility in the Touch Panel and select Test Patterns Figure 6 1 LCD adjustmen...

Страница 235: ...button once to remove the popup bow from the screen and save the current values 6 2 3 2 Contrast Use the recommended LCD settings The contrast is adjusted by the LOGIQ E9 software when selecting scanning modes and doing scanning adjustments Changing the monitor s contrast settings in one mode will influence the picture quality in other modes Table 6 1 Recommended LCD Settings Room Condition Contra...

Страница 236: ...ary To get access to the advanced adjustments press the mode button for more than 10 seconds This will display the Advanced Menu on the screen Menu on LCD original version Screen Color Others Information Language Exit 1 Left 2 Mode 3 Right 4 Microphone Menu on LCD V2 picture OSD Function Exit 1 Left 2 Mode 3 Right 4 Microphone On the LCD V2 Monitor menu you will find the sub menus shown LCD Adjust...

Страница 237: ...ting Gain Retain Factory settings R G B Reset Reset all LCD Color settings to factory default Return Return to the Advanced Menu The Others sub menu has the following choices Screen Size Adjust screen size Menu Position Adjust the menu s position Reset Reset all position settings Return Return to the Advanced Menu The Information sub menu is divided in two First part Input Signal fH Retain Factory...

Страница 238: ...tain Factory settings R G B Reset Reset all LCD Color settings to factory default Return Return to the Advanced Menu The Others sub menu has the following choices Screen Size Adjust screen size Menu Position Adjust the menu s position Reset Reset all position settings Return Return to the Advanced Menu The Information sub menu is divided in two First part Input Signal fH Retain Factory settings kH...

Страница 239: ...tion Adjustment R3 x and earlier Table 6 3 LCD Arm and LCD Monitor range of motion Adjustment R3 x and earlier Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove the Monitor Rear Cover NOTE If the monitor is not level see 8 6 3 2 LCD Monitor installation R3 x and earlier on page 8 117 to level the monitor LCD in vertical position LCD Hinge Nuts ...

Страница 240: ...er software has been updated or replaced when DRX board s or a MRX board has been interchanged when a DRX board s or a MRX board has been replaced when the Back End Processor has been replaced 6 3 2 1 DC Calibration Procedure 1 Disconnect all connected probes 2 Power on the LOGIQ E9 3 On the Touch Panel select Utility Service to access CSD 4 Log in as GE Service enter current password 5 Select Dia...

Страница 241: ...behind the XY Assembly to adjust it correctly Use a 3 mm hex tool to adjust Rotating the screw clockwise will tighten and rotating the screw counterclockwise will loosen the lock Too tight will reduce the slack and make it harder to engage the lock Make the adjustments in 1 4 turn increments and test the lock until the optimum adjustment is achieved NOTE When turning the hex screw do not exceed ha...

Страница 242: ...for the OP vertical movement The Z mechanism can be manually repositioned in the event the drive gear is disconnected or has failed Push and hold the lever toward the center of the device and the OP can be adjusted vertically Z Mechanism Manual adjustment lever WARNING WARNING Operator console can drop unexpectedly when the mechanism is released Table 6 6 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts Items Co...

Страница 243: ... Table 6 7 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 This procedure is intended to release and adjust the XY mechanism Use a small tipped screwdriver and press in until a click or the release releases Some force may be required if the lock adjustment is too tight XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism ...

Страница 244: ... lock is not working or the lock does not respond when pressing the Frogleg Controls Table 6 8 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Release the lock manually See Table 6 7 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism on page 6 11 Remove the four screws 1 Park Lock screws NOTICE DO NOT pull the park lock out the power cable is fragile guide it ...

Страница 245: ... and park lock lever 3 are in these positions the lock will not engage This occurred in some earlier systems The nut and retainer did not return to the charged mode after unlock Park Lock WILL NOT engage when in these positions Table 6 8 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 246: ... housing 5 of the threaded lead screw and the two plastic springs just touch but do not deform Make sure the lever is loose and engages with the lock wheel 6 as shown Before reassembling the lock assembly make sure the nut 2 and lever 3 are in the position as shown Park Lock WILL NOT engage when in these positions Adjustment Set Table 6 8 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism Steps Corres...

Страница 247: ...movement When the lock button is pressed and the console is pushed back into the locked position the U bolt mechanically engages the park lock similar to a car door Pushing the lock button does not affect the locking action of the park lock it only releases the brakes to allow the OP to get pushed into the park lock easier But the lock button must be pushed to get the OP to the locked position Onc...

Страница 248: ... off line use minimum time out and no retries or it will affect shutdown speed The absolute value of the magnetic distortion reading 1 2 Distortion should be consistently less than 1 mm especially since the transducer is held steady in one location It is also important that the reading is not cycling quickly between values such as continuously looping from 0 2 to 0 6 The environmental quality for ...

Страница 249: ...can be acquired at the device or through remote diagnostics InSite ExC These data can be used to perform service at the device or can be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING TESTING AND ADJUSTING WARNING WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E9 SOME METAL SUR...

Страница 250: ...ly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer NOTE This information is normally collected with the Alt D or Gather Logs utility Product Name LOGIQ E9 From the Utility System About screen Applications Software Software Version Software Part Number Build View Build Date System Base Image Software Base Image Revision Image Part Number Image Date ...

Страница 251: ...duct Data DICOM Logs Windows Event Logs Diagnostic Logs Service Logs For a detailed list of Service Logs captured see 7 3 4 Capturing Service Logs with ALT D on page 7 5 When Alt D is pressed a menu box opens Enter the following information System ID serial number Software version System Date and time of occurrence Sequence of events leading to issue Is the issue repeatable Imaging mode probe pres...

Страница 252: ...e system will automatically format if you insert an unformatted disk gather logs and write it out to the disk The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression Double check the media that you made to ensure it contains at least two files An example is shown in Figure 7 2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image a...

Страница 253: ...REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 7 Diagnostics Troubleshooting 7 5 7 3 4 Capturing Service Logs with ALT D The following is a list of the Service logs captured during an ALT D log capture Figure 7 3 Capture Service Example ...

Страница 254: ...data without redirecting or altering it Launch the network sniffer application one of the following two ways 1 On the Regular Scan Screen press Alt N This launches the network sniffer application 2 Select Configure on the Distinct Network Monitor Window 3 Click on Capture Settings after selecting the Configuration pull down menu 4 The Configuration screen opens Figure 7 4 Distinct Network Monitor ...

Страница 255: ...that you only record this system s network activity If you prefer you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now If you do you will capture all network activity not just this system s 5 On the Configuration screen Figure 7 6 Configuration Filters Tab on page 7 7 select the Filters tab 6 In the New Filter section confirm built in templates is selected then click Create Figure 7 6 Co...

Страница 256: ...y IP packets FROM TO one or more IP addresses then select Next The Enter Filter Settings screen opens 8 Enter the IP address you wish to monitor and click the Add button Repeat this step for all IP addresses you wish to add then select Finish The Enter Filter Settings screen closes 9 On the Configuration Screen select the Capture Tab Figure 7 8 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen on page 7 9 Figur...

Страница 257: ... closes 12 On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen select Capture Packets and Statistics Play NOTE The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture Stop 13 Double click on the Go Ichiro icon to start the system application 14 Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot such as Worklist Query Send to PACS etc Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captu...

Страница 258: ... transaction finishes or fails select Ctrl Alt Del to open Task Manager Select Exit to close the application and return to Windows Then open Windows Task Manager to open the Distinct Network Monitor screen 16 From the Task Manager Applications tab select Distinct and then select the Switch To button The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens Figure 7 9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen ...

Страница 259: ...lection a screen similar to Figure 7 11 Save As Capture File dialog box on page 7 11 opens Figure 7 10 Capture Data Sample 18 Select File Save As Enter the file name d log Sniffer MyLog 19 Select Save 20 On the Save As Capture File dialog Figure 7 11 select Save Figure 7 11 Save As Capture File dialog box 21 Check the d log Sniffer directory At a minimum there should be the following two files MyL...

Страница 260: ... they form part of general log collection Alt D or Collect Log 1 Press Alt N 2 On the network sniffer screen select Capture Options 3 Select the interface that will be receiving packets Network card A or Wireless B NOTE Remember if the device has a DVR it will show up in the list Select either Intel Network connection or the Wireless network adapter If you are working with a Wireless connection yo...

Страница 261: ... filters to limit the captured data Filter by IP or by IP and port number By IP only press on Capture Filter 4 Select IP only Use the IP address of the Scanner or the one from the DICOM device under test on the Filter string field using the following syntax example host 3 62 12 33 as shown in Figure 7 14 Capture Filter IP Only on page 7 13 press OK Figure 7 14 Capture Filter IP Only ...

Страница 262: ...e for example DICOM port 104 7 Enter the string with the following syntax port xxx and host yy yy yy yy where xxx is the port number of My Computer in the scanner and yy yy yy yy is the IP address of the device under test PACS server etc 8 Press OK 9 Select Start 10 Minimize network sniffer window and initiate communication to the DICOM device eg send images to the storage device or query Worklist...

Страница 263: ...ys all the packets in the current capture file Each line in the packet list corresponds to one packet in the capture file B Packet Details pane shows the current packet selected in the Packet List pane in a more detailed form This pane shows the protocols and protocol fields of the packet selected in the Packet List pane C Packet Bytes pane The packet bytes pane shows the data of the current packe...

Страница 264: ...ing 12 Type dcm and press Apply The display should filter all DICOM packets filtering out image data 13 Select Capture Stop Or select the icon in the task bar to stop the capture 14 Select File Save As Enter the file name d log Sniffer MyLog MyLog can be changed to the name of your preference WireShark uses the libpcap pcap cap file format as the default format to save captured packets If you need...

Страница 265: ...rather than the entire capture 16 Select SAVE If you perform Alt D or Gather Logs these sniffer logs will be included in the zip file 17 Exit the sniffer application by clicking on the X in the upper right corner 18 If you have already performed Save as you can continue without saving and quit the program Make sure you have saved your data before exiting the program Figure 7 19 Select Capture Disp...

Страница 266: ...stomer to quickly and easily acquire images that can then be viewed by the OLC 7 4 3 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut With the desired image displayed on the screen press Ctrl and PrtSc print screen keys simultaneously If you want to compress or delete them 1 From the touchpanel select Utility Service Utilities Common Utilities Image Compress Delete Utilities 7 5 17 13 Image Compress D...

Страница 267: ...n Service Desktop CSD NOTE To run diagnostics you should detach all probes NOTE Reboot the system after performing any diagnostics before returning the system to customer use NOTE When using the Common Service Desktop do NOT minimize any of the Common Service Desktop windows If you minimize them they end up in the lower left corner of the screen behind the Service Desktop Manager window and cannot...

Страница 268: ...ection 7 5 Common Service Desktop 7 5 2 Error Logs 1 From the Log Viewer page click the Click Here link 2 Select the log you wish to view NOTE Informatics is no longer present for R4 x and later Figure 7 21 Error Logs Log Viewer Figure 7 22 Log Viewer Log Options ...

Страница 269: ...ities menu Text search using the Search menu Color coded log entries to identify severity levels Green A Level 3 severity indicates that the parameter is within 0 50 of specified tolerance Orange brown A Level 2 severity indicates that the parameter is 50 100 of specified tolerance Red A Level 1 severity indicates that the parameter is out of specification Figure 7 23 Log Viewer Sample Page ...

Страница 270: ...erator Feedback 3 Loop Count This is an editable text field that only accepts numeric values of 4 digits or less When the switch is configured as an execute switch and pressed the loop count field will be queried to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic 4 Execute Button This switch has two modes each with appropriate text Execute to start the diagnostic Abort to stop a diagnostic...

Страница 271: ... 8 This button toggles between Standard and Advanced mode The window below shows the advanced features 9 Select the choice for Stop On Failure for the Looping and List sections Yes the test will abort at the first failure No the test will complete even if there are failures 10 Select the choice for Stop On Abort for the Looping and List sections List the list will abort when you click the Abort bu...

Страница 272: ...s one at a time for the maximum loop value then proceeds to the next diagnostic Some diagnostic windows that verify the tolerance of known values compile the test data and display it in a table You can access this data through the Details links 12 Click the Details icon to open the Details window 13 Click the See Details link to compile the Details data 14 The table displays the compiled detail da...

Страница 273: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 7 Diagnostics Troubleshooting 7 25 7 5 3 Diagnostics Window Overview cont d Figure 7 27 Details Window Figure 7 28 Details Table ...

Страница 274: ...stic utility has timed out freezes up will no longer run you have to close the Common Service Desktop and launch it again This may occur when issues with the scanner cause the diagnostic utility to fail completion of an executed test 7 5 5 Diagnostic Symptom Guide Use this Diagnostic Symptom Table to help match a symptom with the possible diagnostic test ...

Страница 275: ...IQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 7 Diagnostics Troubleshooting 7 27 7 5 6 OP Panel Utilities Op Panel Interface The Operator Panel functionality can be tested using a program GE Test App available through the Service Platform R4 or earlier ...

Страница 276: ... OP Panel Test Start Up R5 and later on page 7 31 Figure 7 29 Select System Type R4 or earlier 15 In R4 or earlier on the Startup tab select the Attach button to connect the Op Panel to the test interface The other buttons on the Startup tab will now be active See Figure 7 30 and Figure 7 31 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab Detach and Other Buttons Active R4 and earlier on page 7 30 ...

Страница 277: ...N 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 7 Diagnostics Troubleshooting 7 29 7 5 6 1 Launching the Op Panel Test cont d Figure 7 30 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab Attach Button Active R4 and earlier ...

Страница 278: ... MANUAL 7 30 Section 7 5 Common Service Desktop 7 5 6 1 Launching the Op Panel Test cont d Figure 7 31 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab Detach and Other Buttons Active R4 and earlier 16 Select the tabs to test the various features of the Op Panel ...

Страница 279: ...nching the Op Panel Test cont d For R5 and later the upper right corner indicates the type of Op Panel is detected connected 5207000 series used in consoles 5205000 7 and earlier Upper Lower 5209000 5208000 series used in consoles 5205000 8 and later R5 or later Figure 7 32 OP Panel Test Start Up R5 and later ...

Страница 280: ... pointer over the blue box Verify that the X and Y position are updated as the pointer is moved Test the Left and Right select buttons by pressing each button on the op panel Verify that the corresponding button is highlighted when each button is pressed See Figure 7 33 or Figure 7 34 Figure 7 33 Trackball Tab R4 and earlier Figure 7 34 Trackball Tab R5 and later ...

Страница 281: ...the keyboard functionality by typing on the keyboard Verify that the corresponding key is highlighted when each key is pressed See Figure 7 35 or Figure 7 36 NOTE The keyboard test does not give an indication when the Print Screen button is pressed Figure 7 35 Keyboard Tab R4 and earlier Figure 7 36 Keyboard Tab R5 and later ...

Страница 282: ...h slidepot through its range Verify that the visual and numeric position of the slide pot are updated as the slide pot is moved Test the LED for each slide pot by pressing on the LED buttons See Figure 7 37 or Figure 7 38 Visually verify the LED functionality on the upper operator panel Figure 7 37 Slidepots Tab R4 and earlier Figure 7 38 Slidepots Tab R5 and later ...

Страница 283: ... rotating each encoder knob Verify that the position is updated as the encoder is moved Test the encoder button selection function by pressing each knob on the op panel Verify that the corresponding knob is highlighted when each knob is pressed See Figure 7 39 or Figure 7 40 Figure 7 39 Encoders Tab R4 and earlier Figure 7 40 Encoders Tab R5 and later ...

Страница 284: ... 6 6 Pushbuttons Tab Test the pushbutton functionality by pressing each button on the operator panel Verify that the corresponding pushbutton is highlighted when each button is pressed See Figure 7 41 or Figure 7 42 Figure 7 41 Pushbuttons Tab R4 and earlier Figure 7 42 Pushbuttons Tab R5 and later ...

Страница 285: ...ing 7 37 7 5 6 7 LEDs Tab Test the LED functionality by selecting each button or knob on the GE Test App Verify that the corresponding LED is illuminated when each button or knob is selected See Figure 7 43 or Figure 7 44 Figure 7 43 LEDs Tab R4 and earlier Figure 7 44 LEDs Tab R5 and later ...

Страница 286: ... in the black window by a highlighted circle See Figure 7 45 or Figure 7 46 Figure 7 45 Touch Screen Tab R4 and earlier Figure 7 46 Touch Screen Tab R5 and later Check calibration Touch screen and verify dots follow Calibrate Press and hold each touch target until it moves to next target Select Touch screen test press each target as they appear Calibrate Press Run Windows calibration Press very li...

Страница 287: ...on Diagnostics 7 5 7 1 Disruptive Mode The customer enables this feature by choosing Disruptive Mode and confirming Yes before a GE Service FE can access the customer s ultrasound scanner remotely Disruptive Mode can be requested remotely by the service technician or OLC or it can be selected by the customer directly on the scanner or workstation Section 7 6 Troubleshooting using InSite ExC on pag...

Страница 288: ...r on page 7 96 7 5 8 1 Digital Receive See 7 5 3 Diagnostics Window Overview on page 7 22 for a description of the looping and list features Symptoms Intermittent general problems communication between DRX and GFI Image artifacts pixilated jagged edges 1 Select the Digital Receive checkbox to run all the tests or select the individual subtests to run only the selected tests 2 Enter the desired Loo...

Страница 289: ...OARDS DUE TO THIS FAILURE The Diagnostic DRX Signal Path tests the same functionality without being affected by the issue and will be a reliable test to troubleshoot any issue with the DRX board since it checks bit by bit all vector data send to the FE DRX back at the backend PC Name DRX High Speed Bit Error Description High Speed Bit Error Test on the DRX Run Time 00 03 If this test failed 1 Swap...

Страница 290: ... signal communication issues analog signal path Run Time 00 05 If this test failed 1 Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved 2 Replace any failed DRX boards Name Nathan Alignment Test Description Output TVG of Nathan with system configured for max number of MLAs supported by system Verifies the alignment 16 identical samples in a row of IF to GFI Run Time ...

Страница 291: ... samples in a row of IF to GFI Run Time 00 05 If this test failed 1 Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved 2 Replace any failed DRX boards 7 5 8 2 Memory See 7 5 3 Diagnostics Window Overview on page 7 22 for a description of the looping and list features Symptoms Intermittent Problems Communication Problems 1 Select the Memory checkbox to run all the tes...

Страница 292: ...nal and external RAM of the GFI Board NOTE There may be multiple board dependencies causing this test to fail Also see the FDEMOD Signal Test 7 5 8 1 Digital Receive on page 7 40 Run Time 00 01 If this test failed 1 Replace the GFI board Name DRX IF FPGA Memory Test Description Tests memory of Interface FPGAs on the DRX boards NOTE Also run the DRX Memory Test next test below for a full range of t...

Страница 293: ...ption Tests memory of Interface FPGAs on the GTX boards NOTE Also run the GTX Memory Test next test below for a full range of testing capacity Run Time 00 01 If this test failed 1 Replace the failed GTX board Name GTX Memory Test Description Tests memory of the David ASICs on the GTX Board Run Time 00 01 If this test failed 1 Replace the failed GTX board ...

Страница 294: ... 7 22 for a description of the looping and list features Symptoms TGC Problems Doppler Audio Problems Image Artifacts Intermittent Instability 1 Select the GFI checkbox to run all the tests or select the individual subtests to run only the selected tests 2 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 3 Click Execute to run the test s ...

Страница 295: ...d 2 If the diagnostic identifies problems with other boards run tests on those boards also 3 Replace any other failed boards as identified by the diagnostics for those boards Name GFI Analog Test Description Tests the analog circuitry of the GFI Board NOTE Used for test purposes only There may not be any symptoms displayed by the system Run Time 00 03 If this test failed 1 Also run the Analog RX T...

Страница 296: ...GFI Fan Test Description Test Front End card rack fan control and fan speed measurements Run Time 00 40 If this test failed 1 Check fan drawer in Front End Card Rack Verify connection with backplane Replace defective fan 2 Replace GFI board Name GFI GTX Test Description Test communication with the GTX Board Same as the GFI Memory Test Run Time 00 03 If this test failed 1 Based on failure informati...

Страница 297: ...the looping and list features Symptoms High temperature reports on the Home page Temperature specifications are out of tolerance Voltage specifications are out of tolerance 1 Select the System checkbox to run all the tests or select the individual subtests to run only the selected tests 2 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 3 Click Execute to run the test s ...

Страница 298: ...ay beneath the card rack if the tachometer readings are slow 4 Check the fan on the BEP and replace the fan if it is not working 5 Replace the GFI board if none of the above fixes the temperature problems Name System Voltage Test Description Compares all system voltages to their specified values Run Time 00 01 If any system is out of tolerance 1 Check the voltage test points on the system boards 2...

Страница 299: ...tics Window Overview on page 7 22 for a description of the looping and list features Symptoms Image artifacts Image noise Poor image quality Missing image channels 1 Select the Noise checkbox or the individual subtest to run the test 2 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 3 Click Execute to run the test ...

Страница 300: ...un the tests for 7 5 8 8 Analog Receive on page 7 54 7 5 8 6 Transmit Name GTX High Speed Bit Error Test Description High Speed Bit Error Test on the GTX Run Time 00 03 If this test failed 1 Swap GTX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved 2 Replace any failed GTX boards 3 Interface to GFI may be the cause of the failure See 7 5 8 3 GFI on page 7 46 Name Tx P6 Ille...

Страница 301: ... DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved Replace any failed DRX board 3 Run Analog Receive Tests from section 7 5 8 8 Analog Receive on page 7 54 4 Replace GRX boards 5 Replace GRLY NOTE Tx Rx Chain Test Tx1 Tx Rx Chain Test Tx2 These tests will be removed from the Service Diagnostics folder They will remain in the Engineering Diagnostics folder NOTE GRLY folde...

Страница 302: ...dow Overview on page 7 22 for a description of the looping and list features Symptoms Image artifacts channel failure noise 1 Select the Analog Receive checkbox to run all the tests or select the individual subtests to run only the selected tests 2 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 3 Click Execute to run the test s ...

Страница 303: ... RX Test High Gain Description Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to high peak gain Failures could be channel in DRX boards Nathan GRX to DRX communication Run Time 00 02 If this test failed 1 Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved NOTE A block of 8 dead channels indicates a failed DRX board 2 Replace any failed boards 3 Replace GRX boards ...

Страница 304: ...tion Signal path test of the GRX boards with a TGC set to low gain Run Time 00 02 If this test failed 1 Swap DRX boards to determine if the failure point changes as the boards are moved NOTE A block of 8 dead channels indicates a failed DRX board 2 Replace any failed boards 3 Replace GRX boards these cannot be swapped as one is 64 channel and one is 128 channel ...

Страница 305: ...a sine wave generated on the GFI test vector generator TVG and injected on the GRX board s The setup of the analog Doppler is done through a 512 bit setup word The output signal from the GRX will depend on the Doppler setup For example the frequency will be determined by the frequency of the signal in and the Mixer clock setup The signal passes through the analog Doppler circuitry of the GRX board...

Страница 306: ...m peak RMS SNR and THD This is calculated for I Q data separately Disconnect all probes before running diagnostics Run Time 00 05 If this test fails 1 Verify the following tests pass GFI Tests Analog Receive Tests If these tests pass and the GRX aCW Dual Channel test fails 2 Replace the CW GRX board Name Service Diagnostics Analog CW GRX aCW Beam Forming A sum of sine waves with the same frequency...

Страница 307: ...Hz and a mixer frequency of 2 5 MHz The dither and Pedof probe inputs are disabled The test enables one channel pair plus each of the other channel pairs per sub test one at the time The parameters to test for are fdop spectrum peak RMS and SNR on the I data Are the probes connected The test will run with probes connected to the scanner but it is recommended to disconnect all probes before running...

Страница 308: ...obes before running diagnostics Run Time 00 05 1 Verify the following tests pass GFI Tests Analog Receive Tests If these tests pass and the GRX aCW Post Mixer Gain test fails 2 Replace the CW GRX board Name Service Diagnostics Analog CW GRX aCW Doppler LPF For the Low Pass Filter test Doppler test frequencies both in the filter pass band and the stop band are set up The mixer clock frequency is se...

Страница 309: ...e following tests pass GFI Tests Analog Receive Tests If these tests pass and the GRX aCW Dither Injection test fails 2 Replace the CW GRX board Name Service Diagnostics Analog CW GRX aCW Pedof In the test the two center frequencies of 2 MHz and 6 MHz are verified These frequencies are set by switching the Pedof band pass filter The GFI test signal generator is used to input sine waves The Pedof t...

Страница 310: ...e Tests If these tests pass and the GRX ADC Digital LVDS test fails 2 Replace the CW GRX board Name Service Diagnostics Analog CW GRX Mixer Phase Setup This test utilizes a PCA9554 I2C register on the GRX board All phase bits are set to one in the analog Doppler setup data before reading back from the I2C register and test bits 6 and 7 in the returned byte Next all zeroes are sent to the analog Do...

Страница 311: ...ning of system voltage problems I O Board Pwr Supply Test System comes up in simulator mode run I O Board GFI Voltage Test Unable to run diagnostics No doppler audio system audio general audio sounds run I O Board Audio Test No display on the monitor 1 Select the I O Board Tests checkbox to run all the subtests or select the individual subtests to run only the selected tests 2 Enter the desired Lo...

Страница 312: ...problem continues 2 Run the GFI tests to determine if the GFI is faulty See 7 5 8 3 GFI on page 7 46 Name I O Board GFI Temperature Test Description Reads temperature sensors on the GFI board and compares the values against specified limits Run Time 0 05 If this test failed 1 Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and or swap the cable with a known good cable If the problem c...

Страница 313: ...em continues 2 Swap the USB cable device with a known working cable device If the problem continues 3 Replace the I O Board Name I O Board Audio Test Description Test all the audio channels on the I O board Run Time 00 03 If this test failed 1 Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and or swap the cable with a known good cable If the problem continues 2 Run the GFI tests on 7...

Страница 314: ...f this test failed 1 Verify that the BEP to Backplane cable is properly connected and or swap the cable with a known good cable If the problem continues 2 Swap monitors with a known working monitor If the problem continues 3 Replace the monitor Name Video Status Service Description Tests if the I O can detect the primary monitor and the mother board video signal Run Time 00 01 If this test failed ...

Страница 315: ...n page 7 22 for a description of the looping and list features Symptoms System will not scan Interrupted scanning Scan unexpectedly stops 1 Select the Tx Power Supply Test checkbox to run all the subtests or select the individual subtests to run only the selected tests 2 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 3 Click Execute to run the test s ...

Страница 316: ... Description Transmit Power Supply GFI Watchdog Test Tests that the power supply watchdog is working Run Time 00 07 If this test failed 1 Replace the power supply Name TxPs Alarm Test Description Transmit Power Supply Alarm Test Tests the fault detection of power supply Run Time 00 04 If this test failed 1 Replace the power supply Name TxPs Keep Alive Test Description Transmit Power Supply Keep Al...

Страница 317: ...tics Window Overview on page 7 22 for a description of the looping and list features Symptoms System shuts down immediately after power loss interruption 1 Select the Extended Power Shutdown Tests checkbox to run all the tests or select the individual subtests to run only the selected tests 2 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 3 Click Execute to run the test s ...

Страница 318: ...test failed 1 Run the I O board tests see 7 5 8 10 I O Board Tests on page 7 63 2 Replace the I O board if there are any problems If the I O board tests are OK 3 Replace the Extended Power Shutdown Name Extended Power Shutdown Load Test NOTE Run this test with only one 1 loop Do not run multiple loops on this test Each loop will cause the battery to discharge power requiring a longer time to recha...

Страница 319: ...t features Symptoms 3D triangulation position is off wrong V Nav Issues poor tracking NOTE RF EMI interference may also cause conditions of these symptoms See 2 2 3 EMI limitations on page 2 5 1 Select the bayBIRD Tests checkbox to run all the tests or select the individual subtests to run only the selected tests 2 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 3 Click Execute to r...

Страница 320: ...m still persists replace the bayBIRD Name Sensor 2 Description Runs the tests for Sensor 2 Run Time 00 21 If this test failed 1 Move the sensor transducer to a different port If the transducer fails replace the transducer 2 If the problem still persists replace the bayBIRD Name Sensor 3 Description Runs the tests for Sensor 3 Run Time 00 21 If this test failed 1 Move the sensor transducer to a dif...

Страница 321: ...73 7 5 8 13 bayBIRD Tests cont d Name Transmitter Description Runs the tests for Transmitter Run Time 00 21 If this test failed 1 If the problem still persists replace the bayBIRD Name System Description Runs the tests for System Run Time 00 25 1 If the problem still persists replace the bayBIRD ...

Страница 322: ... the current version of the DVR board if installed Run Time 00 01 1 If fails re seat board and run DVR self test 2 If problem persist replace DVR Board Name DVR self Test Description This test executes a self test of the DVR Board if installed Run Time 00 07 1 If fails re seat board 2 If problem persist replace DVR Board Figure 7 48 DVR Test Screen ...

Страница 323: ...Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 2 Click the Execute button 3 Failed tests may have another diagnostic test that can help isolate the failure or will indicate which part to replace For PCI Bus configuration CMOS memory CPU run 7 5 10 3 System Board on page 7 76 RAM run 7 5 10 9 Memory on page 7 81 Hard Drive status and Random Seek run 7 5 10 4 Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan on page 7 77 ...

Страница 324: ... tests on essential functions of the PC Mother Board The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window Run Time About 1 minute 1 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 2 Click the Execute button If there are any failures 3 Check the Motherboard Harness Swap with a known good harness If the problem continues 4 Replace the Motherboard If the problem continues...

Страница 325: ...e run 7 5 10 5 Hard Disk Drive Quick Test on page 7 78 before running this test The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the Hard Disk Drive controller and the drive mechanism are working correctly The disk surface itself is also checked Drive Status Hard Disk Drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one track at a time Random Seek Hard Disk Drive heads are mov...

Страница 326: ...st results are displayed in the Status portion of the window Run this test before running the 7 5 10 4 Hard Disk Drive Surface Scan on page 7 77 Run Time May take about 6 minutes 1 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 2 Click the Execute button If there are any failures 3 Defragment the Hard Disk Drive See 7 5 17 10 Disk Defragmenter on page 7 93 If the problem continues ...

Страница 327: ...The following tests are performed on your monitor Memory Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns one pattern at a time The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color Data Transfer This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller These tests will appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various sizes ...

Страница 328: ... s features Runs a test on essential functions of the Network Interface The test requires the system to be connected to a network The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window This test gives the current status of the network and provides the option to restart the network components in the BEP 1 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less Click the Execute b...

Страница 329: ...iability see Table 7 126 on page 7 159 and Table 7 127 on page 7 160 Each folder contains separate tests for Wired and Wireless Adapters 7 5 10 9 Memory See 7 5 3 Diagnostics Window Overview on page 7 22 for a description of this window s features Runs a test on essential functions of the Memory The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window 1 Enter the desired Loop Count numer...

Страница 330: ...sts writing and reading data to a DVD R disk DVD RDL Not supported Tests writing and reading to a DVD R double layer disk DVD RW Not supported Tests writing and reading a DVD RW disk DVD R Not supported Tests writing and reading to DVD R media DVD RDL Not supported DVD R double layer DVD RW Not supported DVD RW read write test DVD_RAM Not supported DVD RAM read and write test DVD READONLY Not supp...

Страница 331: ...k DVD R into the drive Enter the command cd insite_home PCDoctor bin pcd run file scripts dvdminusr xml There is another test with a CD R disk It is not recommended because it takes over 30 minutes If you want to run the CD R test enter the command pcd run file scripts cdr xml R Table 7 2 BEP Interactive Test Description Table R4 x Test Description AVI playback Tests playing back an AVI file CD R ...

Страница 332: ...sually the default choice is the correct one 3 Click the Start button 4 Press each key on the system s keyboard once and make sure the corresponding keys on screen are removed from view Click the Pass button if all the keys are removed from the PC Doctor Keyboard Test Click the Fail button if any key is not removed from the on screen keyboard Failed keys may be damaged and you may have to have you...

Страница 333: ...iddle Footswitch Left Windows F11 Right Footswitch Left Windows F12 7 5 12 2 Mouse Trackball See 7 5 3 Diagnostics Window Overview on page 7 22 for a description of this window s features Runs a test on essential functions of the Trackball The test results are displayed in the Status portion of the window 1 Enter the desired Loop Count numeric value of 4 digits or less 2 Click the Execute button 3...

Страница 334: ...click the Pass button Click the Close button 5 Do not perform the Microphone Interactive Test Click the Close button 6 To test the WAV sound reproduction click Left Channel Right Channel or Both Channels to test your speakers You should hear a guitar chord 7 Click on the Beep button You should hear a low beep from your PC 8 Click the Close button 9 When you return to the Audio Test screen click th...

Страница 335: ...ibration follow the directions on the Touch Screen As each of the cross hairs appear touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser NOTE You MUST hold your finger on the cross hair until it moves to the next location If you just tap the calibration cross hair there is a good chance your calibration will be corrupt 7 5 13 2 Calibration Verification The Start Touch Screen Verification brings up a gr...

Страница 336: ...resence of the 4D Motor Controller Run Time 00 01 If this test failed 1 Verify USB connection between the Host and the Main Power Supply 2 Verify 4D Motor Controller connections in Main Power Supply 3 Replace 4D Motor Controller Name Version Test Description Displays the 4D Motor Controller version number Run Time 00 01 If this test failed 1 Verify USB connection between the Host and the Main Powe...

Страница 337: ...o red arrow in the icon indicating that no 4D Motor Controller was detected Re run the 4D Motor Controller Presence Test in this case 4 Replace the 4D Motor Controller board Name 4D Test Description Performs a basic 4D scan using the RAB2 5 probe connected in probe socket 4 Run Time 00 11 If this test failed 1 Verify an RAB2 5 probe is connected to probe socket 4 right most probe socket 2 Verify t...

Страница 338: ...tient I O Module to the Host via the GFI INPUT The connection of ECG leads PHONO PCG or AUX is optional OUTPUT The results display information about the signal data acquired from the ECG input to the Patient I O Module The information includes the minimum signal value maximum signal value and mean signal value If this test fails 1 Run GFI tests If GFI is ok 2 Replace Patient I O module If this tes...

Страница 339: ... to update the list after adding or deleting Software Option Keys 7 5 16 2 InSite ExC Agent Configuration Device Name LE9_ the serial number CRM Name may be different in different countries poles equivalent to the System ID Enter the appropriate data for the InSite ExC configuration and click the Submit Changes button NOTE If data is missing from any required fields the form will refresh and the r...

Страница 340: ...nnections 7 5 17 6 Windows Services View the Windows Services that are started and running A Windows Service is a computer program that has been automatically started and is running in the background on the computer 7 5 17 7 User Accounts View the user accounts that have been given access to this system 7 5 17 8 Shared Resources This screen displays all shared network resources on this system 7 5 ...

Страница 341: ...ly reduced while the Disk Defragmenter is running 1 Select the Volume drive you want to defragment or analyze for fragmentation Click the Defragment button to defragment the selected volume Click the Analyze button to generate an Analysis Report that identifies any files that require de fragmenting Continue with step 2 below Figure 7 49 Disk Defragmenter Window NOTE The Disk Defragmenter Window ma...

Страница 342: ...pplication is not running logs can be gathered using the Gather Logs shortcut on the Windows desk top 7 5 17 12 Image Viewer Utility The Image Viewer Utility lists the availability of images for export This example shows no images available for export 7 5 17 13 Image Compress Delete Utility Select the images you want to compress or delete This example shows no images available at this time Compres...

Страница 343: ...umentation Interface Use this to view the user and service documentation for the system You need to have your documentation disk inserted in the drive in order to open it Otherwise you will see the message displayed in Figure 7 50 Scanner Documentation Interface Window Figure 7 50 Scanner Documentation Interface Window ...

Страница 344: ...stomer s ultrasound scanner 7 5 17 17 Telnet Server Control Telnet Server must be running to allow remote access to the DOS command prompt window Click the Start button to run Telnet Server NOTE Telnet Server is a Windows service that runs in the background StopTelner Server when you are not using it to perform a service action It can slow the system down if left running in the background 7 5 18 U...

Страница 345: ...ces should be identified before the unit is installed Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect Some of these sources include medical lasers scanners cauterizing guns computers monitors fans gel warmers microwave ovens light dimmers portable phones The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference When talking to th...

Страница 346: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 7 98 Section 7 5 Common Service Desktop This page was intentionally left blank ...

Страница 347: ...nt procedures 8 1 Chapter 8 Replacement procedures Section 8 1 Overview 8 1 1 Purpose of this chapter This chapter describes how to remove and install or replace modules and subsystems in the LOGIQ E9 It also includes instructions for installing and re installing the software ...

Страница 348: ...DS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF Beware that the Main Power Supply Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet When the BEP door is open the Extended Power Shutdown circuit board or ChargeBoard ...

Страница 349: ...OURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING THE WASTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE DISPOSED AS UNSORTED MUNICIPAL WASTE AND MUST BE COLLECTED SEPARATELY CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OR OTHER AUTHORIZED DIS...

Страница 350: ... with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site for example body coils or an ultrasound Probe The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry as well as the people who will receive or open this package NOTE The US Department of Transportation DOT has ruled that items that were saturated and or dripping with human blood that are now caked wit...

Страница 351: ...rews nuts Table 8 1 Tools used for servicing LOGIQ E9 TOOL TYPE TOOL SIZE TORX BIT TX 10 BIT TX 15 BIT TX 20 BIT TX 25 BIT TX 30 BIT Tx 45 FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER 1 4 inch or 6 mm PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER PH1 PH2 PH3 HEX KEY 5 mm 8 mm 10 mm OPEN END WRENCH TORQUE WRENCH 5 mm 10 mm 13 mm 3 16 inch Up to 81 Nm 59 7 lbf ft ADJUSTABLE WRENCH 152 mm 6 inches long PRY BAR approximately 18 inches overall 457 ...

Страница 352: ...3 Definitions of Left Rear Back Right and Front Section 8 3 Definitions of Left Rear Back Right and Front Figure 8 1 illustrates what is the Left Side 1 Rear Back 2 Right Side 3 and Front 4 of the LOGIQ E9 Figure 8 1 Definitions of Left Rear Back Right and Front 3 2 1 4 ...

Страница 353: ... available FMIs NOTE Service Dongle is not required and should NOT be installed during the software loading session Table 8 2 LOGIQ E9 Software Configurations and Hardware Software Compatibility Upgrade Options CONSOLE MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION Phase I BT2010 BT2011 BT2013 BT2014 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 2 0 3 2 0 4 2 0 5 3 1 2 3 1 3 4 Rev x x 5 Rev x x 5205000 LOGIQ E9 00 240 VAC Y...

Страница 354: ...anagement Function Start Disk Management Manually Speak with the personnel at the site to determine which patient images need to be backed up prior to starting NOTICE In order to complete a successful restore of the Patient Database if needed the images must be moved away from LOGIQ E9 before doing backup of the Patient Database Depending on the location set up either move the images to a remote s...

Страница 355: ...n the Hard Disk Drive all stored data including all set up data will be lost It is considered to be the best practice to always move images away from the Hard Disk Drive do backup of databases etc and record important configuration data on paper before starting a software load or reload as described earlier in this section The software is delivered on two CDs one for the system software which is t...

Страница 356: ...turned on except for USB Flash Drives If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed save all Service Presets if you are connected to InSite to restore remote connectivity after something is completed save all User Presets NOTE After a full or partial system software load confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving Time feature is turned off Utility System General Date Tim...

Страница 357: ...You will perform a Restore after the install For a full Base load this step is mandatory For a C Partition load this step is precautionary in the event the software load has issues The data should transfer over for a C Partition load See the latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual Chapter 3 6 Confirm with customer that all patient data has been archived If not perform the archive 7 Inser...

Страница 358: ...ve and press CTRL C The System Software Load Instruction window displays Figure 8 3 System Software load instruction R1x x Figure 8 4 System Software load instruction R2 x x NOTICE If you select 1 in the next step ALL existing software and data will be erased If backup has not been performed as described earlier in this manual all data like Patient Database System Configuration and User Configurat...

Страница 359: ... 1 or 2 the Software loader program launches The Norton Ghost window displays 13 Wait for the software installation to complete Typical installation time 5 10 minutes Status bar on the screen indicates progress The Base Load Complete message displays See NOTICE below Figure 8 5 Norton Ghost window WARNING WARNING Do not interrupt the software loading at any time Figure 8 6 Base Load Complete messa...

Страница 360: ... windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen At times it may look like the system is unresponsive 17 Wait for the System Settings Change window asking Do you want to restart your computer now to display approximately 1 2 minutes after the desktop is displayed 18 Select Yes see Figure 8 7 to restart NOTE In R2 x x a DOS window will display that times out and automatically reboots the system You ca...

Страница 361: ...ded in the Kit into the DVD drive Power down the LOGIQ E9 Wait until the LCDs on the Operator Panel are switched off and the ON switch has turned amber Power ON the LOGIQ E9 Some Windows screens will be displayed before displaying the software load warning message The scanner boots from the Software disk and displays a load warning message System Software Load warning message 2 R5 Base Image consi...

Страница 362: ...gram will begin to launch and the following warning will appear You are about to reload the entire disk If you DO NOT want to do this remove the CDROM from the CDROM drive and Press CTRL C now to exit and power cycle your system to restart without overwriting your disk drive s current contents Press any key to continue The Software loader program will continue to launch In R5 or later at some poin...

Страница 363: ...t 7 Remove the base load disk NOTE If you do not remove the disk the base load process repeats when the LOGIQ E9 boots up 8 To restart the LOGIQ E9 type exit and press enter to reboot When the LOGIQ E9 reboots it automatically logs on to start checking hardware This is a normal process NOTE If the LOGIQ E9 does not reboot press and hold down the Power ON OFF button button turns amber Allow the har...

Страница 364: ...utomatic reboot is complete Restart Windows Message 10 Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights up From Windows double click on My Computer to confirm the CD DVD drive is mapped to G If the drive is not mapped to the G From the Desktop a select My Computer b Open C remap newmap c Double click on newmap bat to remap the drive Remove the Service Dongle Table 8 4 Softwar...

Страница 365: ...s not open in a minute perform steps A C below A From the Desktop select My Computer B Double click the G drive to open the pop up window in above C Double click on LoadSoftware bat to load the software NOTE If the base image does not match the part number and revision of the approved base image then the system notifies you of the required base image needed and does not run the software A Command ...

Страница 366: ...eboot the System installs the Service Platform NOTE After the Service Platform installs and during the second reboot you may get some error messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down If present these messages are normal and should be ignored After the Service Platform reboot the Start Application window displays Figure 8 10 LoadSoftware Information Window Do not...

Страница 367: ... the Basic Option string is not saved in the Option Dongle or if this is a software upgrade the SW License window may open NOTE If only the title bar is visible in the lower left corner of the monitor double click the SW License title bar to expand the window NOTE All systems must have at least the Basic Option string for the software to run Any single Option String may enable multiple options i e...

Страница 368: ...ongle section is are the same as recorded in Table 4 10 Software Option Keys on page 4 26 3 If needed enter any new or missing option key string s in S W Option Key field and select Add 8 4 6 9 Verifying the TCP IP settings 1 From the Touch Panel select Utilities Connectivity TCP IP 2 Verify that all settings on the TCP IP screen match those recorded in Table 4 2 Record settings from TCP IP screen...

Страница 369: ... in the drive 5 Select Restore Now Depending on the selection one or two Restore confirmation windows are displayed 6 Ensure that the correct source is selected and select OK The selected items are copied to the systems If items from the System Configuration are restored the system needs to be rebooted The Reboot system window is displayed 7 Select OK to reboot the system and verify the Customer P...

Страница 370: ...D Drive while the system is running 2 Reboot the system The Start Application window displays 3 Select Install SW Press OK on the Start Loader message and then press OK on the New System Software message A Command window similar to the example shown in Figure 8 15 Command Window on page 8 25 opens Table 8 1 Loading the Software Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Po...

Страница 371: ... NOTE When the LoadSoftware Information Window displays asking you to select OK do nothing This window closes automatically 5 Wait while the software loads approximately 7 8 minutes Do not interrupt this process and ignore any errors After the software load is complete the system reboots Figure 8 15 Command Window Figure 8 16 LoadSoftware Information Window Do not select OK WARNING WARNING Do not ...

Страница 372: ...application loads after a SW reload you may see the error shown in Figure 8 18 SW Reload Error Message Select OK and reboot the system During the reboot process the system may prompt for the Basic Option string valid license see Figure 8 19 Enter Option String on page 8 27 If the Basic Option string is not saved in the Option Dongle or if this is a software upgrade the SW License window may open N...

Страница 373: ...ay enable multiple options i e Basic R2 x x requires basic plus BT2010 option String Demo Option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time Do Not leave a demo Option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer 8 4 7 1 Verifying the software versions 1 From the Touch Panel select Utility System About 2 Verify the software version Ensure that the software version shown on the scree...

Страница 374: ...8 4 7 2 Verify and Update Vital Product Data It is essential that Vital Product Data VPD is verified or updated after any hardware change to the Back End Processor BEP or Front End Processors NOTE NOTE Failure to properly program Vital Product Data could cause adverse affects on system operation and image quality ...

Страница 375: ...8 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 29 Section 8 5 Replacing Covers and Bumpers 8 5 1 Purpose of this section This section describes how to replace the Covers and Bumpers on the LOGIQ E9 ...

Страница 376: ...erson 5 minutes per Side Cover Refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9 on page 8 5 Table 8 3 Preparations and Preparation Link Preparations you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I O Cabling Preparation Link if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 ...

Страница 377: ... the stand Table 8 4 Side Covers removal Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 NOTE The removal procedure is easier if the rear lock is released first and then the front lock The Side Covers are clicked on to the LOGIQ E9 with two locks located at the lower end of the cover 1a Push a 1 phillips screwdriver into the rectangular hole in the Side Bumper until it reaches the lock mechanism 1b Push the handle ...

Страница 378: ...If the LOGIQ E9 has the Removable Fan Tray the right Side Cover removes by removing the Fan Tray and the four Phillips screws at the bottom of the Cover Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9 Remove the four Phillips screws at the bottom of the Cover Table 8 4 Side Covers removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 379: ...f the Side Cover with the slots on the Top Cover Place the top edge of the Side Cover so it hooks onto the Top Cover 2 Align and squeeze the front edge of the side cover to latch it into place Position the Side Cover side lock first Position the Side Cover front lock Align and squeeze the bottom front of the side cover to latch it into place Position the Side Cover rear lock lifting up the rear ta...

Страница 380: ...g Covers and Bumpers 3 If the LOGIQ E9 has the Removable Fan Tray reinstall the four Phillips screws at the bottom of the Cover Slide the Fan Tray into the LOGIQ E9 Make sure the Fan Tray SEATS COMPLETELY into the Card Cage Table 8 5 Side Covers removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 381: ... Removable Fan Tray Cover removal installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9 2 Flip the Fan Tray over and lay on a safe surface Remove the four screws securing the Fan Tray Cover to the Fan Tray Retain the screws 3 Install the replacement Cover and secure with the screws removed 4 Reinstall the Fan Tray Assembly ...

Страница 382: ...tes Refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9 on page 8 5 Table 8 8 Preparations and Preparation Links Preparations you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I O Cabling 3 Remove the Left Side Cover and loosen the Top Cover Preparation Links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power s...

Страница 383: ...Console Cover removal installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Loosening the Top Cover or removing it will allow the Front Cover to flex enough to slide the Shear Wave Console Cover out Slide the Cover out 2 Reinstall the replacemnt Cover 3 Reinstall the Top Cover if removed and the Side Cover 4 If the Top Cover was removed perform Functional Checks See 8 5 4 3 Calibration and adjustments 8 5 4 ...

Страница 384: ...u must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I O Cabling 3 Remove Side Covers Preparation Links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 Table 8 12 Top Cover removal Top Cover Screw placement as seen from above Steps Corresponding Graphi...

Страница 385: ...e 8 13 Top Cover Installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove the two screws reinstalled to avoid damage to the Rear Handle Position the Top Cover onto the Front Cov er at the four hooks Install and tighten the two Phillips screws Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover seen from front Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover seen from side ...

Страница 386: ...5 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 14 Top Cover replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Sc...

Страница 387: ...wer cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I O Cabling 3 Remove the Side Cover s Preparation Links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 Table 8 17 Side Bumpers removal Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Unscrew and remove the six screws and washers that fasten the Side Bumper to the Side Cover Remove the Side Bumper fr...

Страница 388: ... Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 19 Side Bumpers replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief ...

Страница 389: ... One person 15 minutes No additional tools required Table 8 21 Preparations and Preparation Link Preparations you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I O Cabling Preparation Link if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 Table 8 22 Side Latch for Foot Rest Bumper Steps Corr...

Страница 390: ... include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 23 Foot Rest Bumper installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Position the Foot Rest Bumper in place Push the Foot Rest Bumper down and over the pedals You may need to push down the pedals to be able to place the Foot Rest Bumper 2 Replace the...

Страница 391: ... 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I O Cabling 3 Remove the Side Covers Top Cover and the Foot Rest Bumper Preparation Links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 4 Top Cover replacement on page 8 38 8 5 6 Foot Rest Bumper replacement on page 8 43 Table ...

Страница 392: ...over installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Thread the Front Cover so it fits in between chassis and pedals Align the Front Cover guide pins with holes in the frame Front Cover Assembly cover on left and probe plate on right with guide pins Fasten Front Cover with two Phillips screws 2 Install the Foot Rest Bumper the Top Cover and the Side Covers ...

Страница 393: ...ctional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 29 Front Cover replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Scrip...

Страница 394: ... Refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9 on page 8 5 Table 8 31 Preparations and Preparation Links Preparations you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I O Cabling 3 Remove the Side Covers Top Cover Foot Rest Bumper and the Front Cover Preparation Links if you need more informati...

Страница 395: ...s Label Placement Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove the adhesive from the new Label and place it above the Probe Connector openings as shown If replacing the Label only remove the old Label completely Table 8 34 Plate Connectors w Guide installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Position the plate and snap it into position 2 Install the Front Cover Foot Rest Bumper Top Cover and the Side Covers...

Страница 396: ...e Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 35 Plate Connectors w Guide replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use 4 2 3 Power shut down 4 3 14 Probe Connectors Checks 4 3 5 B M...

Страница 397: ... Placement Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 If the Side Cover Assemblies are replaced reinstall the VET Label as shown 1 If the Rear Cover Assembly is replaced reinstall the For Veterinary use only Label for the Rear Cover Assembly as shown NOTE The Back Cover Label with ETL Label is not a Spare Part 2 If a Probe is replaced reinstall the For Veterinary use only Label for Probes as shown For Veterina...

Страница 398: ...rm the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet Follow this link if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 9 4 Filter Cover removal 1 Gently pull the Filter Cover out and away from the System 8 5 9 5 Back Filter Cover installation 1 Inspect the Filter and clean if necessary 2 Place the Filter Cover into position and pr...

Страница 399: ... before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use 8 5 10 Filter replacement See 8 7 2 Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement cleaning on page 8 176 Table 8 37 Filter Cover replacement Functional Checks See Section Functio...

Страница 400: ...d to remove the Rear Cover See 8 12 5 Assembling or replacing the On Board V Nav Stand on page 8 310 8 5 11 1 Manpower One person 15 minutes 8 5 11 2 Tools For tools needed refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9 on page 8 5 8 5 11 3 Preparations When preparing for the replacement you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from th...

Страница 401: ...0 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 55 8 5 11 4 Rear Cover removal 1 Remove the two Phillips screws on each side of the Rear Cover 2 Lift the Rear Cover away Figure 8 21 Rear Cover fixing screws ...

Страница 402: ...e sure the manual release handle of the Z Mechanism extends through the air vent on the Rear Cover 3 Position the Rear Cover into place 4 Gently pull up on the Z Mechanism s manual release handle to confirm proper position through the Rear Cover air vents 5 Install the four screws two on each side 6 Inspect the Filter and clean in necessary 7 Install the Filter 8 Install the Filter Cover 9 Re inst...

Страница 403: ...wing functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 38 Rear Cover replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9...

Страница 404: ... 15 minutes 8 5 12 2 Tools For tools needed refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9 on page 8 5 8 5 12 3 Preparations When preparing for the replacement you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet Follow this link if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 ...

Страница 405: ...m 2 Push the handle on the screwdriver to the left to release the lock 3 Open the Door I O Panel 4 Hold the Door I O Panel near the upper hinge 1 and pop hinge out and away from the upper hinge post 2 on the Rear Cover 8 5 12 5 Door I O Panel installation 1 Place the Door I O Panel into position by sliding lower hinge 3 onto lower hinge post 4 2 Pop the upper hinge into place onto the upper hinge ...

Страница 406: ...lowing functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 39 Door I O Panel replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LO...

Страница 407: ...ing steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet 3 Remove the Side Covers 4 Remove the Rear Cover Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 11 Rear Cover replacement on page 8 54 8 5 13 4 Cable Hook removal 1 Locate the Cable Hook s 2 Place the Rear Cover face down on a p...

Страница 408: ...s and Bumpers 8 5 13 4 Cable Hook removal cont d 8 5 13 5 Cable Hook installation 1 Position the Cable Hook on the Rear Cover 2 Install the screw to secure the Cable Hook to the Rear Cover 3 Repeat step 2 to replace the other Cable Hook if necessary Figure 8 26 Cable Hook screw placement ...

Страница 409: ...unctional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 40 Cable Hook replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Scri...

Страница 410: ...ystem 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all Probes and External I O Cabling 4 Remove Side Covers 5 Remove Rear Cover Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 11 Rear Cover replacement on page 8 54 8 5 14 4 Rear Bumper removal 1 Remove the two screws securing the Rear Bumper 2 ...

Страница 411: ...unctional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 41 Rear Bumper replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Scr...

Страница 412: ...e from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I O Cabling Preparation Link if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 Table 8 44 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation R4 Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove Arm Assembly Covers The Rear 1 and Upper 2 LCD Arm Covers snap into place and removed in the direction shown The Upper Cover must be installed bef...

Страница 413: ...er 1 remove two Phillips screws and lift the cover off Lift Arm Cover Right 2 and Lift Arm Cover Left 3 remove the 3 mm screws and slide the Cover toward the Monitor Joint Cover 4 slightly push the bottom of the Cover forward to bow the cover and pry at the leading forward edge of the Cover to remove Extension Arm Cover 5 remove the 3 mm screw and lower cover Install covers in the reverse motion T...

Страница 414: ...he covers loosening 8 5 15 3 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 46 LCD Monitor V2 Arm Assembly Covers replacement Funct...

Страница 415: ...s power cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all Probes and External I O Cabling 4 Remove the Side Covers 5 Remove the Rear Cover 6 Remove the Top Cover Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 11 Rear Cover replacement on page 8 54 8 5 4 Top Cover replacement on page 8 38 8 5 16 4 Rear Handle removal 1 Remo...

Страница 416: ...rews removed earlier have been installed 2 If finished connect cables and Probes removed earlier 3 Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended 8 5 16 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5...

Страница 417: ...nect all Probes and External I O Cabling 4 Remove the Right Side cover Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 17 4 Printer Filler Storage 1 Release the fixing bracket 2 Pull the Printer Filler Storage forwards out of the system 8 5 17 5 Printer Filler Storage installation NOTE The Printer Filler Storage is us...

Страница 418: ...ended 8 5 17 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 48 Printer Filler Storage replacement Functional Checks See Section F...

Страница 419: ...following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all Probes and External I O Cabling 4 Remove the Side Covers 5 Remove the Top Cover Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 4 Top Cover replacement on page 8 38 8 5 18 4 Column Cover Assembly removal 1 ...

Страница 420: ...l height 4 Remove the remaining screw on the right side that secures the Column Cover Assembly 5 Remove the two screws on the left side that secure the Column Cover Assembly 6 Remove Column Cover Assembly NOTE The Main Cable Cover will also be released Figure 8 30 With console raised upper right side screw placement Figure 8 31 With console raised left side screw placement ...

Страница 421: ...allation 1 Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges 2 Install screws to Column Cover Assembly tighten by hand 3 Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover 4 Install the Top Cover 5 Install the Side Covers Figure 8 32 Position the column cover inside the front cover ...

Страница 422: ...rm the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 49 Column Cover Assembly replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Po...

Страница 423: ...own the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all Probes and External I O Cabling 4 Remove the Side Covers 5 Remove the Top Cover 6 Remove the four screws to the Column Cover Assembly Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 4 Top Cover replacement on page 8 38 8 5 18 Colum...

Страница 424: ...overlaps Main Cable Cover on page 8 77 2 With the console raised to its full height install the 3 screws to secure the Main Cable Cover and Column Cover Assembly 3 Lower the console and install the lower right side screw see Figure 8 29 With console lowered lower right side screw placement on page 8 73 4 Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover 5 Install the Top Cover 6 Install t...

Страница 425: ...m the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 50 Main Cable Cover replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON...

Страница 426: ...trol and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE E...

Страница 427: ...ase point and pressing until release Pull the console out to its extended position to gain access to the screws in the next step 2 Under the XY Frogleg mechanism identify the four separate covers There are two types of covers one type has two screws 1 and the other type has one screw 2 3 Remove the screws from the cover s to replace Figure 8 35 XY Frogleg mechanism release Figure 8 36 XY Frogleg m...

Страница 428: ...rs the XY 5 Disconnect the cable 6 Remove the screw securing the ground 7 Thread the cover s off the cable 8 5 20 5 Covers under XY Frogleg motors installation 1 Thread the cover s on the cable 2 Perform a dry fit of the covers confirm the covers face the correct way before connecting the cable and ground 3 Install the screw securing the ground 4 Connect the cable 5 Slide cover s into place 6 Repl...

Страница 429: ...p the system to verify that it operates as intended 8 5 20 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer Table 8 51 Covers under XY Frogleg motors Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all ...

Страница 430: ...ng steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all Probes and External I O Cabling Follow this link if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 21 4 Bulkhead Cover removal 1 At the rear of the system release the console s frogleg mechanism by inserting a screwdriver into the release point and pressing until release Pull ...

Страница 431: ...ad Cover removal cont d 2 Use thumbs to press upper lock tabs toward the front of the system to release the top of the Bulkhead Cover 3 Pull the Bulkhead Cover away from the system Figure 8 39 Bulkhead Cover Figure 8 40 Upper lock tabs placement on Bulkhead Cover Figure 8 41 Bulkhead Cover Tabs cover removed ...

Страница 432: ...nnect cables and Probes removed earlier 3 Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended 8 5 21 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and...

Страница 433: ...ON 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 87 Section 8 6 Replacing Top Console Parts 8 6 1 Purpose of this section This section describes how to replace the Top Console parts ...

Страница 434: ...form the following steps NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON O...

Страница 435: ... 8 55 LCD Rear Cover Labels Console FRU Action Console is third edition compliant labels ARE ON the LCD Monitor Cover FRU DOES NOT have the new labels on the LCD Cover The original VESA cover with new labels should be used on the replacement Monitor to maintain compliance of the console Console is pre third edition compliant and the new labels ARE NOT on the LCD Monitor Cover FRU HAS the new label...

Страница 436: ... slightly lift up the end to disengage the Velcro then pull the dongle out of the USB port LCD Monitor Cables and Clamps WLAN Dongle removal 3 Tilt the monitor back to vertical position Lock the monitor back into place vertically Loosen the four screws by turning each screw between one half and one turn counter clockwise You don t need to remove the screws Lift the LCD Monitor assembly upwards unt...

Страница 437: ...stall the LCD Monitor assembly on the Monitor Bracket Verify that all four fixing screws have engaged in their slots Place a level on the monitor as shown Tighten the four screws torque 160 Ncm 14 2 lbf in NOTE If a level is not available make sure the Monitor is as square as possible with the system visually 2 Tilt the monitor to horizontal position Connect the cables 1 If the cables were replace...

Страница 438: ...the new labels on the LCD Cover the original VESA cover with new labels should be used on the replacement Monitor to maintain compliance of the console See Table 8 55 LCD Rear Cover Labels on page 8 89 4 Perform Functional Checks See 8 6 2 7 Calibration and adjustments 8 6 2 8 Verification and 8 6 2 9 Functional Checks on page 8 101 Table 8 57 LCD Monitor installation R3 x and earlier Steps Corres...

Страница 439: ...ers the cable to the monitor To get access to the cable connector remove the Cable Cover Table 8 58 LCD Monitor V2 removal R4 x Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove the LCD Cable Cover fixing screws 2 The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the LCD with a retaining screw 1 an EMC shielded retainer 2 and two phillips screws 3 Remove the screws and retainer Disconnect the Cable from the LCD ...

Страница 440: ...M KEEP THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IN THE LOCKED POSITION THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE 4 Keep the LCD supported and remove the two M5x20 screws and spring lock washers which mount the LCD to the Arm Assembly Table 8 58 LCD Monitor V2 removal R4 x Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 441: ... CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE Keep the LCD supported and mate the flat surfaces of the LCD Arm to the flat surfaces of the LCD mounts Install the LCD Arm Assembly to the LCD with the two M5x20 screws and spring lock washers removed Torque 9 8 Nm 7 2 lbf ft 86 7 lbf in 2 The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the LCD with a retaining screw 1 an EMC shielded retainer 2 and two phil...

Страница 442: ...rm Lock is LOCKED Check that the system is level Place a level on the monitor as shown Tighten the four screws torque 160 Ncm 14 2 lbf in NOTE If a level is not available make sure the Monitor is as square as possible with the system visually Re install the LCD Cable Cover and fixing screws 4 Perform Functional Checks See 8 6 2 7 Calibration and adjustments 8 6 2 8 Verification and 8 6 2 9 Functio...

Страница 443: ...tor V2 removal R5 x and later Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove the LCD Cable Cover fixing screws 2 The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the LCD with a retaining screw 1 an EMC shielded retainer 2 and two phillips screws 3 Remove the screws and retainer Disconnect the Cable from the LCD 3 WARNING WARNING WHEN REMOVING THE LCD FROM THE ARM KEEP THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IN THE LOCKED POSITION THE SPRIN...

Страница 444: ...r Phillips screws 1 Loosen the upper Phillips screws 2 The Monitor will be supported by the two upper screws Slide the Monitor off of the Arm Assembly Remove the upper Phillips screws to reinstall into the replacement LCD Monitor Upper Monitor mounting screw and hole Table 8 60 LCD Monitor V2 removal R5 x and later Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 445: ...Y AND PROPERTY DAMAGE 2 Reinstall the upper two Phillips into the Monitor With the Monitor flat slide the Monitor onto the Arm Assembly The Monitor will be supported by the two upper screws Reinstall the two lower Phillips screws 1 and tighten the upper Phillips screws 2 Make sure the Monitor is level before tightening the screws securely 3 The LCD Cable to LCD is secured to the LCD with a retaini...

Страница 446: ...el Place a level on the monitor as shown If any adjustment is required loosen the four mounting screws and make the adjustment Re tighten the four screws after the adjustment NOTE If a level is not available make sure the Monitor is as square as possible with the system visually Re install the LCD Cable Cover and fixing screws 5 Perform Functional Checks See 8 6 2 7 Calibration and adjustments 8 6...

Страница 447: ...ended 8 6 2 9 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 62 LCD Monitor assembly replacement Functional Checks See Section Func...

Страница 448: ...for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE EPS EXTENDED POWER SHUTD...

Страница 449: ...aphic 1 Disconnect the LCD cables video P10 and power P3 from the connectors on the Bulkhead The Gel Warmer cable P1 does not have to be removed LCD Cables at Bulkhead 2 Push the LCD Mount Lock handle 1 into the unlocked position shown LOCKED DO NOT loosen nut 2 Move the LCD Arm from side to side when at the same time pulling upwards until you can lift LCD Arm assembly away LCD Mount Lock Handle ...

Страница 450: ...cables down through the console opening Push the LCD Mount Lock handle 1 into locked the position shown LOCKED DO NOT adjust nut 2 LCD Mount Lock Handle 2 Connect the LCD cables video P10 and power P3 from the connectors on the Bulkhead The Gel Warmer cable P1 does not have to be removed Install the Bulkhead Cover Install the LCD Monitor assembly LCD Cables at Bulkhead 3 Perform Functional Checks ...

Страница 451: ...r 2 WARNING WARNING WHEN REMOVING THE LCD ARM KEEP THE ARM LOCKED AS SHOWN TO ENSURE THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IS IN THE LOCKED POSITION UNTILL THE ARM AND LCD ARE INSTALLED THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE 3 Remove the Bulkhead Cover 4 Disconnect the LCD cables video P10 and power P3 from the LCD The Video Cable has a re...

Страница 452: ...EV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 106 Section 8 6 Replacing Top Console Parts 5 Remove the Set Screw Carefully lift the Arm Assembly up from the LOGIQ E9 Table 8 67 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly removal R4 Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 453: ...m assembly installation R4 Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 WARNING WARNING WHEN INSTALLING THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY KEEP THE LCD ARM IN THE LOCKED POSITION THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTALLING A NEW FRU KEEP THE SHIPPING WRAP INTACT TO ENSURE THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IS IN THE LOCKED POSITION UNTIL THE LCD IS INSTALL...

Страница 454: ... the Adapter first Position the Video Cable Connector as shown and continue to feed the cables into the Adapter Install the Arm Assembly 3 Position the Arm Assembly so the Set Screw mounting hole faces the left side of the LOGIQ E9 Install the Set Screw Torque 9 8 Nm 7 2 lbf ft 86 4 lbf in Table 8 68 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation R4 Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 455: ...y be necessary to push the cables up before installing the Bulkhead Cover NOTICE DO NOT connect the LCD power cable to the power P3 connector on the Bulkhead when the LOGIQ E9 is powered up Damage to the LCD Power Cable and or the Bulkhead Board can occur See images below of damage that can occur 48VDC pin in the P3 connector center pin shows damage The outside two pins are Ground Cable left Bulkh...

Страница 456: ...the cable to flex in the up direction when the Bulk Head Cover is installed Install the Bulkhead Cover 7 Remove the shipping wrap if present DO NOT damage the surface of the Arm Assembly 8 Install the Bulkhead Cover 9 Perform Functional Checks See 8 6 3 4 Calibration and adjustments 8 6 3 5 Verification and 8 6 3 6 Functional Checks on page 8 117 Table 8 68 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation...

Страница 457: ...ARM KEEP THE ARM LOCKED AS SHOWN TO ENSURE THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY IS IN THE LOCKED POSITION UNTILL THE ARM AND LCD ARE INSTALLED THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE 3 Remove the Bulkhead Cover 4 Disconnect the LCD and Arm cables Video P10 and power P3 from the LCD and the and ground Cable from the Arm The Video Cable has ...

Страница 458: ...LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 112 Section 8 6 Replacing Top Console Parts 5 Remove the Set Screw Carefully lift the Arm Assembly up from the LOGIQ E9 Table 8 69 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly removal R5 and later Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 459: ...bly installation R5 and later Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 WARNING WARNING WHEN INSTALLING THE LCD ARM ASSEMBLY KEEP THE LCD ARM IN THE LOCKED POSITION THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE LCD CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE 2 Make sure the Bushing is installed and positioned in the orientation shown The larger hole in the Bushing is to accommodate the pi...

Страница 460: ...Arm and Cables and feed the LCD Power Cable into the Adapter first Position the Video Cable Connector as shown and continue to feed the cables into the Adapter Install the Arm Assembly 4 Position the Arm Assembly so the Set Screw mounting hole faces the left side of the LOGIQ E9 Install the Set Screw Torque 9 8 Nm 7 2 lbf ft 86 4 lbf in Table 8 70 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation R5 and la...

Страница 461: ...ables It may be necessary to push the cables up before installing the Bulkhead Cover NOTICE DO NOT connect the LCD power cable to the power P3 connector on the Bulkhead when the LOGIQ E9 is powered up Damage to the LCD Power Cable and or the Bulkhead Board can occur See images below of damage that can occur 48VDC pin in the P3 connector center pin shows damage The outside two pins are Ground Cable...

Страница 462: ...sh with your thumb The S bend allows the cable to flex in the up direction when the Bulk Head Cover is installed Install the Bulkhead Cover 7 Install the Bulkhead Cover 8 Perform Functional Checks See 8 6 3 4 Calibration and adjustments 8 6 3 5 Verification and 8 6 3 6 Functional Checks on page 8 117 Table 8 70 LCD Monitor V2 Arm assembly installation R5 and later Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 463: ...de to side and ensure that it moves as intended 8 6 3 6 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 71 LCD Arm assembly replacem...

Страница 464: ...ON THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS Beware that the Main Power Supply Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugge...

Страница 465: ...D cables video P10 and power P3 from the LCD The Video Cable has a retainer and screw Loosen the screw with a small flat blade screwdriver 3 Remove the Ground Cable from the LCD Adapter and the Bulkhead Discard the new FRU will includes the cable and mounting hardware LCD Ground Cable installed 2 Remove the Plate The plate is captured by the two retaining pins that protrude from the Adapter NOTE A...

Страница 466: ...REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 120 Section 8 6 Replacing Top Console Parts 1 Remove the two M5 x 50 hex key screws using a 4 mm Hex Key Remove adapter Table 8 74 V2 LCD Arm Assembly Adapter removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 467: ...st Plate is installed 2 NOTE MAKE SURE the rear mounting hole for the Arm Neck Lock Pin in the Trust Plate is aligned with the rear mounting hole of the Adapter BEFORE installing the Plate If the Plate is installed incorrectly it may be very difficult to remove Align the rear mounting hole for the Arm Neck Lock Pin in the Trust Plate with the rear mounting hole of the Adapter Seat the Plate The pl...

Страница 468: ...removed earlier have been installed 2 If finished connect cables and Probes removed earlier 3 Power up the LOGIQ E9 to verify that it operates as intended NOTICE DO NOT connect the LCD power cable to the power P3 connector on the Bulkhead when the LOGIQ E9 is powered up Damage to the LCD Power Cable and or the Bulkhead Board can occur See images below of damage that can occur 48VDC pin in the P3 c...

Страница 469: ...ction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use Table 8 76 V2 LCD Arm Adapter replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Checks Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Leakage Current measured at record the value and meets allowable limits Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use 4 2 3 Pow...

Страница 470: ... CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS Beware that the Main Power Supply Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet 1 Select Utility Connectivity TCP IP Wireless Network Configuration 2 As a ...

Страница 471: ... installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 NETGEAR USB dongle WN111 is identified with the following markings Remove the dongle from the Factory packaging Remove the plastic cover from the dongle and discard Remove the Velcro pieces from the Factory packaging Discard all other items included in the dongle packaging only the dongle and Velcro are required 2 Choose a piece of Velcro with the Hook g...

Страница 472: ... Velcro if the opposite piece is already attached to the LCD WLAN with opposite piece of Velcro attached 4 Install the WLAN dongle into the USB port lifting slightly to prevent the adhesive from attaching before the dongle is installed Once installed push on the end of the dongle to adhere the adhesive NOTE To remove the dongle slightly lift up the end to disengage the Velcro then pull the dongle ...

Страница 473: ...latest revision of the LOGIQ E9 Basic User Manual Chapter 16 When the WLAN is active an icon appears in the status bar to indicate whether the WLAN is installed or disconnected WLAN Active WLAN not Active 2 Select Utility Connectivity TCP IP Wireless Network Configuration If enabled Available Wireless Networks appear If not connected Highlight the wireless network you wan to use Click Connect at t...

Страница 474: ...e the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 82 WLAN replacement instructions Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use 4 2 3 Power shut down 4...

Страница 475: ...ly pull the flexible Probe Holder Insert out of the lower UI frame Large 1 and small 2 soft Probe Holder Inserts Probe Holder placement 2 To remove the dongle slightly lift up the end to disengage the Velcro then pull the dongle out of the USB port Table 8 84 Probe Holder Insert installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Install the flexible Probe Holder Insert into the lower UI frame Be sure the ...

Страница 476: ...he knobs one by one to remove them Table 8 86 Operator Panel Knobs installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 NOTE The Operator Panel knobs are concentric knobs the center shaft has a D shape Replace the outer knobs first then the inner ones Install the knobs one by one in their respective positions OP Panel Knobs P2 P3 P4 Auto Depth Steer Width R L B P1 3D 4D Measure Comment Clear Zoom CHI CF PDI...

Страница 477: ...y OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly 2 Remove the five OP Panel Knobs NOTICE Failure to remove the five OP Panel Knobs first could cause damage to the knob shafts 3 At the rear of the system release the frogleg mechanism for the console by inserting a screwdriver into the release point and pressing until release Pull the console out to its extended position to gain access to the screws in the next step...

Страница 478: ...ssembly slightly from the bottom and then tilt the top toward the front of the system There are tabs at the bottom of the Touch Panel Assembly Pull straight up on these tabs NOTE For better access swing the LCD Monitor to the side Removing the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly 6 Disconnect the cables at the back of the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly see Figure 8 42 Upper OP Panel Touch Pane...

Страница 479: ...hey are on so tightly that you cannot take them off using your fingers use a pair of pliers and rotate them back and forth to work them off These spacers prevent the Op panel from working past its mounting surface and getting sucked too far into the upper frame causing the Op panel to get twisted and causing problems Figure 8 42 Upper OP Panel Touch Panel assembly cable placement R4 and earlier 1 ...

Страница 480: ...Parts 8 6 8 1 Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly removal cont d Figure 8 43 Upper OP Panel Touch Panel assembly cable placement R5 and later 1 Upper OP Panel 4 USB Video J22 2 USB Main Display J25 5 48V Power ON OFF LOGIC to BEP J23 3 USB BEP J21 6 Upper to Lower Connector Power J17 top USB J16 ...

Страница 481: ...Cable 2 from bulkhead position furthest from the OP in position J25 2 Trackball Cable from the Operator Panel Lower 6 USB Cable 1 part of Main Cable in position J21 3 A N Cable from the A N Keyboard 7 USB Cable 2 part of Main Cable in position J22 4 Bulkhead Board USB Cable 1 from bulkhead position closest to the OP in position J24 8 Power On Off switch part of Main Cable in position J23 NOTICE Be...

Страница 482: ...ny of the cables when installing the Touch Panel Assembly OP PANEL REG REG UPPER OP BULKHEAD BOARD 48V USB AUDIO KEYBOARD USB ON CN4 CN7 CN10 J12 J26 ENABLE VPD OFF USB UP DN LOCK BUTTONS BUTTONS LIGHTS ROTARIES SLIDES BULKHEAD PLATE MEMORY STICK MICROPHONE J7 J5 3 3V 12V 12V 5V 48V P8 P1 P3 P4 J22 J21 J25 J23 J18 J3 J4 J17 P5 P6 L J52 J51 J53 10 4 SVGA LED BKLight LOWER OP USB HUB 2 USB HUB 3 TRA...

Страница 483: ...the cables to the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly before installing it to the system 9 Power ON OFF from BEP 10 USB Upper OP Panel from BEP 11 USB Video from BEP if present Cables to Upper OP 4 Install the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly into the Frame UI Upper Be sure the Upper OP Bezel alignment tabs are positioned correctly into the slots in the Lower OP Bezel and Frame UI Upper Cover U...

Страница 484: ... any of the cables when installing the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly 5 Install the four screws to the Back Cover from behind Back Cover of the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly Screws and Washers 6 Install the five OP Panel Knobs Table 8 88 Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly installation cont d Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 485: ...ecks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 89 Upper Operator Panel Touch Panel Assembly installation Functional Checks See Section Functiona...

Страница 486: ...NTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE EPS EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN BATTERY AT J3 OR THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEB...

Страница 487: ...r Panel Remove the two shift keys cap lock arrows using the key removal tool the MacGyver keycap removal tool will work as well e g a paperclip to expose the screws that secure the keyboard to the Lower Operator Panel NOTE If the keycap plunger does not come off with the key you have to reinstall it Keycap Tool Keyboard Mounting Screw NOTICE To avoid damaging the keytops use a small Phillips screw...

Страница 488: ...keys will include these actuators So remove these if they get left over when removing the shift keys Using both hands lift up on the Keyboard space bar The Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly tabs will act like a hinge Slide the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly out and away from the tabs Remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard screws M3 x 8 Elastomer Actuators on Keyboard Assembly Table 8 92 Alphanumeric A N Ke...

Страница 489: ...llation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Guide the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly tabs into the slots Lower the Alphanumeric Keyboard making sure the plastic fingers seat into the board Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly tabs 2 Lower the Alphanumeric Keyboard making sure the plastic fingers seat into the board Alphanumeric Keyboard plastic fingers 3 Install the two screws 4 Install the keytops ...

Страница 490: ...s Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 94 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief...

Страница 491: ...THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE EPS EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN BATTERY AT J3 OR THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS Beware that the Main Power Supply Extended Power Shutdown or Charg...

Страница 492: ...n access to the screws in the next step The screws are available from the underside of the OP Panel Lower Frame Frogleg mechanism released and console extended 2 Remove the five longer and the three shorter screws closest to front that secure the Lower Operator Panel to the Lower Operator Panel Frame Assembly Access the screws from beneath the Lower OP Panel Frame Assembly Screw placement Lower OP...

Страница 493: ...Lower OP Panel up until the Trackball Assembly just clears the Lower OP Panel Frame Assembly handle Pull the Lower OP Panel out and away from the Lower OP Panel Frame Assembly Store it on an ESD safe place Flex points on Lower OP Panel when the front edge is lifted Table 8 97 Lower Operator Panel OP removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 494: ...e that these stay intact There are d ring inserts in to spots in the Mode keys DO NOT let these come apart Remove all the knobs NOTE The two encoders near the trackball have different knobs than the other six locations These knobs have taller ribs inside so they sit higher up on the shaft This position prevents the knob from hitting the puffy feature on the bezel Turn the board over face down Remo...

Страница 495: ...edures 8 149 2 Detach the five joystick encoder cables that stick through the Upper OP I O Joystick Encoder Cables 3 DO NOT remove the flat J1 cable that is attached to the Lower Op Panel Board J1 Cable attached Table 8 98 Lower Op Panel Board replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 496: ...rews Slowly and carefully lift the board away from the Lower Op Panel Bezel IF any of the keycap holders are upset reset them DO NOT drop the Lower Op Panel Bezel because you will have to replace all of the keycap holders Lower Op Panel Board screws Table 8 98 Lower Op Panel Board replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 497: ...MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 151 5 Remove the TGC dust gasket The gasket is included with the complete Lower Panel and the Lower Panel Circuit Board TGC Dust Gasket Table 8 98 Lower Op Panel Board replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 498: ...placement Table 8 99 Lower Bezel Replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove and transfer keycap and carriers over to the new Lower Bezel Remove and transfer Encoders to the new Lower Bezel Remove and transfer the Trackball ring of keys parts to the new Lower Bezel Ring of Keys Parts used on P N 5207000 33 and prior only ...

Страница 499: ... the Bezel with pivot points E A Trackball Key Bottom B Trackball Key Left C Trackball Key Top D Trackball Key Right E Trackball Key Pivot Points One Pivot Point E shown on Bottom Key A The Keys MUST BE tilted up to remove Keys A Bottom B Left and D Right are squeezed to be removed Key C Top Pivot Points are pulled outward Table 8 99 Lower Bezel Replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic B A C D E ...

Страница 500: ...ion 8 6 Replacing Top Console Parts 8 6 10 2 2 Touch Panel Joystick Encoder Replacement Table 8 100 Touch Panel Joystick Encoder Replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 From the front of the Lower Bezel remove the hex nut from the Joystick Encoder Encoder Hex Nuts ...

Страница 501: ...s 8 155 8 6 10 2 3 Depth Type Joystick Encoder Replacement Table 8 101 Depth Type Joystick Encoder Replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove the elastomer covering from the Lower Bezel Elastomer Cover 2 Flip the board over Detach the cable Flip the board over again Bottom of Board ...

Страница 502: ... the hex nut Joystick Encoder Nuts top view of board Table 8 102 Mode Encoder Replacement Step 1 These encoders plug into the headers on the board so remove the nut from the top side and pull out the encoder from the bottom side NOTE The elastomer is on the top side Table 8 101 Depth Type Joystick Encoder Replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 503: ...RVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 157 8 6 10 2 5 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement Table 8 103 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Align the elastomer guides Elastomer Elastomer Guides bottom view ...

Страница 504: ...ntified 3 When replacing the Lower Op Panel Bezel Make sure that carriers buttons knobs are all in place before setting the Lower Op Panel Board on top of the Lower Bezel Ensure that the board is flat on top of the bezel Put a few screws in then flip it over to make sure none of the buttons are cocked or out of place Replace the remaining screws D Replace the TGC dust gasket The clear plastic back...

Страница 505: ...dures 8 159 4 Replace the TGC dust gasket The clear plastic backing must be facing down when the bezel is installed The clear plastic backing should be facing up from this view TGC Dust Gasket to Lower Bezel Table 8 103 Elastomer Lower Op Panel Replacement Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 506: ...sembly sharply or the edge tips may break Slide the left and right Lower OP Panel edge tips carefully between the Upper OP Panel Frame 1 white and the Lower OP Panel Frame 2 blue Begin to slide the Lower OP Panel into its compartment while making sure the Trackball Assembly just clears the Lower OP Panel Frame Assembly handle Left edge tip of Lower OP Panel Assembly 3 Place the Lower OP Panel into...

Страница 507: ...ks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 105 Lower Operator Panel OP replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Scri...

Страница 508: ...ge 8 166 4 Separate and remove the Storage Tray or Transvaginal Probe Holder from the Options Holder if applicable Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 6 12 Gel Warmer replacement on page 8 166 8 6 13 Storage Tray Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement on page 8 170 NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM...

Страница 509: ...cement procedures 8 163 8 6 11 4 Options Holder removal 1 From underneath the Upper Console remove the three screws securing the Options Holder 2 Remove the Options Holder from the Upper Console Figure 8 46 Screws underneath upper console gel warmer and option tray shown ...

Страница 510: ...er first and then install the Gel Warmer to the Options holder NOTE Be sure the Gel Warmer cable fits in the cable channels and is not pinched 2 Position the Options Holder in place NOTE Be sure the Gel Warmer cable fits in the cable channels and is not pinched 3 Install the three screws securing the Options Holder 4 Install the Storage Tray or Transvaginal Probe Holder to the Options Holder if ap...

Страница 511: ...ee 8 6 12 Gel Warmer replacement on page 8 166 8 6 11 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 106 Options Holder Left or R...

Страница 512: ... WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE EPS EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN BATTERY ...

Страница 513: ...e is routed through the cable channel 1 and the lower frame support 2 Pull the Gel Warmer cable through the lower frame cable support to free the cable 4 Remove the Options Holder 8 6 11 Options Holder Left or Right Support replacement on page 8 162 5 Remove the two screws at the Gel Warmer base 6 Lift the Gel Warmer out of the Options Holder Figure 8 48 Gel Warmer Cable placement Figure 8 49 Opti...

Страница 514: ... Holder and Gel Warmer and through the cable channel 2 NOTE Be careful not to pinch wires 2 Install the two screws at the Gel Warmer base securing the Gel Warmer to the Options Holder Torque 3 Nm 2 2 lbf ft 3 Install the Options Holder 4 Route the Gel Warmer cable through the lower frame cable support 5 Connect the Gel Warmer cable to the bulkhead 6 Replace the Bulkhead Cover Figure 8 50 Options H...

Страница 515: ...e a closed bottle of gel applicator end first in the gel warmer Verify warmer is operational 8 6 12 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is read...

Страница 516: ...See 8 6 12 Gel Warmer replacement on page 8 166 and 8 6 14 Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV TR Probe Holder on page 8 172 Follow this procedure for replacement or replacing a tray with a Probe Holder or a Probe Holder with a tray 8 6 13 1 Storage Tray Transvaginal Probe Holder removal 1 Locate the two prongs below the tray or Probe Holder 2 Squeeze the two prongs together then li...

Страница 517: ...E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 171 8 6 13 2 Storage Tray Transvaginal Probe Holder installation 1 Seat the tray or Probe Holder tab into the options holder base and snap into place Figure 8 53 Seat and snap into place ...

Страница 518: ...instructions when removing the gel warmer and replacing it with a Storage Tray or a TV TR Tray 8 6 14 1 Gel Warmer removal Before starting this procedure see 8 6 12 Gel Warmer replacement on page 8 166 1 Remove the Gel Warmer 2 Seat the tray tab into the options holder base and snap into place See Figure 8 53 Seat and snap into place on page 8 171 Figure 8 54 TV TR Probe Holder installed ...

Страница 519: ...Q E9 on page 8 5 8 6 15 3 Probe Cable Hook removal 1 Unscrew the fastening screw The screw may be locked with Lock Tite so you may need to apply a little extra force 2 Remove the Cable Hook 8 6 15 4 Probe Cable Hook installation 1 Position the Probe Cable Hook Figure 8 55 2 Fix it in place by using an M5x20 screw with an M6 washer Lock Tite has to be used Torque 50 Ncm 0 37 lbf ft or 4 4 lbf in fi...

Страница 520: ... Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 108 Probe Cable Hooks replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use 4 2 3 Power shut down 4 3 14 Probe Connectors Checks 4 3 5 B ...

Страница 521: ...00 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 175 Section 8 7 Main Console parts replacement 8 7 1 Purpose of this section This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console ...

Страница 522: ...filters to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause the system to overheat and reduce system performance and reliability It is recommended the filters be cleaned quarterly once every three months or more often in locations where high levels of dust are present The LOGIQ E9 has two air filters which need to be cleaned The top air filter is located on the back of the LOGIQ E9 below the power cord...

Страница 523: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 177 2 Lock the Brakes Table 8 109 Removing and Cleaning Filters Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 524: ...ove the filter B Bottom Filter Remove the Filter Assembly by lowering the handle NOTE The handle for the bottom filter is located in the same location for both Filter Assemblies 4 Clean the Rear Filter after it is removed by removing excess lint or dust from the soiled side or vacuum if necessary Table 8 109 Removing and Cleaning Filters Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 525: ...ecessary use a clean soft brush or vacuum 6 Reinstall the rear and tuck the edges of the filter under the Rear Bumper and Rear Cover Reinstall Filter Cover 7 Reinstall Bottom Filter by positioning the filter under the system and placing the handle into the stowed position The filter will be drawn to the filter mounting magnets Table 8 109 Removing and Cleaning Filters Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 526: ...e system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 110 Rear Filter Installation Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208...

Страница 527: ...d through the right rear wheel well 2 Insert the first and second fingers of your right hand through the filter removal loop 3 Using the first and second fingers of the your hand lever down on the filter removal loop and the fingers of the right hand NOTE This action will prevent your fingers from being struck by the filter when you remove it and it pops loose Figure 8 56 Bottom Filter Looped Stra...

Страница 528: ...ont d 4 Remove the filter from the frame NOTE The filter frame will clear your fingers as you remove the filter Figure 8 58 Filter removed Figure 8 59 Bottom View to show Removing the Filter WARNING WARNING Tilting the system is NOT a recommended method for the removal of the filter The bottom view in Figure 8 59 is only for illustrative purposes ...

Страница 529: ... Removal Process with Non loop Type Strap 1 Locate the strap on the right hand side of the LOGIQ E9 which can be viewed through the right rear wheel well 2 Grasp the filter removal strap with the thumb and index finger of your right hand Figure 8 60 Non loop Type Strap Figure 8 61 Fingers Holding Strap ...

Страница 530: ...st and second fingers of your left hand lever down on the filter removal strap NOTE This action will prevent your fingers from being struck by the filter when you remove it and it pops loose 4 Remove the filter from the frame NOTE The filter frame will clear your fingers as you remove the filter Figure 8 62 Placement of Fingers Around Strap Figure 8 63 Removing Filter Frame ...

Страница 531: ...o wedge a finger just under a corner of the filter In this step firmly take hold of the piece of cloth that extends from the filter 3 Position your other hand at a corner of the filter and wedge a finger between the filter and the bottom of the LOGIQ E9 4 Pull down on the filter with the finger that is wedged between the filter and the LOGIQ E9 while pulling on the piece of cloth that extends from...

Страница 532: ...l Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 111 Filter replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Po...

Страница 533: ...ocations where high levels of dust are present Table 8 112 Removable Fan Tray Filter cleaning Manpower Time Tools One person 15 minutes No tools are needed to replace the filter Table 8 113 Preparations and Preparation Link Preparations you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet 3 Remove the Removable Fan Tray Preparation Li...

Страница 534: ...er latch and slide the Filter out Clean the Bottom Filter after it is removed by removing excess lint or dust from the soiled side If necessary use a clean soft brush or vacuum 3 Reinstall the Filter into the Fan Tray and reinstall the Fan Tray Make sure the Fan Tray seats completely into the Card Cage Table 8 114 Removing the Fan Tray Filter Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 535: ...omer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 115 Rear Filter Installation Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready fo...

Страница 536: ... and later Table 8 116 Removable Fan Tray Assembly replacement installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Slide Fan Tray out of the LOGIQ E9 2 Flip the Fan Tray over and pull out the Filter latch and slide the Filter out 3 Reinstall the Filter into the Fan Tray Assembly and install the Tray into the Card Cage Make sure the Fan Tray seats completely into the Card Cage ...

Страница 537: ...s no unusual noise from the Fan Assembly 8 7 4 6 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 117 Fan Assembly replacement Functi...

Страница 538: ...page 8 5 NOTE This procedure requires an extended HEX key UNBRAKO ALLEN key due to the high torque 130 Nm 95 9 lbf ft 8 8 2 3 Preparations When preparing for the replacement you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all Probes and External I O Cabling 4 Remove both Side Covers 5 Remove the Rear Bumper 6 Remove ...

Страница 539: ...ate the brakes 7 The system is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster 8 Make the LOGIQ E9 rest on both Front Casters and lift the Rear Caster Put the Wooden Wedge under the chassis This will stabilize the LOGIQ E9 with one Rear Caster free from the floor This Rear Caster can now be removed 9 Unscrew and remove the fixing bolt Save the bolt for later use 10 Remove the Rear Caster...

Страница 540: ...s to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement 1 Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed 2 If finished connect cables and Probes removed earlier 3 Power up the system to verify that it starts as it should 8 8 2 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the custom...

Страница 541: ...ge 8 5 8 8 3 3 Preparations When preparing for the replacement you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all Probes and External I O Cabling 4 Remove both Side Covers 5 Remove the Foot Rest Bumper Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on ...

Страница 542: ...etween one Front and one Rear Caster 7 Make the LOGIQ E9 rest on both Rear Casters and lift the Front Caster 8 Put the Wooden Wedge under the chassis This will stabilize the LOGIQ E9 with one Front Caster free from the floor 9 Unscrew and remove the fixing screws T 45 for the Front Caster that is free from the floor Save the screw for later use 10 Remove the Caster 11 Disconnect the lock by unscre...

Страница 543: ...all screws removed earlier have been installed 2 If finished connect cables and Probes removed earlier 3 Power up the system to verify that it starts as it should 8 8 3 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Directi...

Страница 544: ...RVICE MANUAL 8 198 Section 8 9 BEP Back End Processor parts replacement Section 8 9 BEP Back End Processor parts replacement 8 9 1 Purpose of this section This section describes how to replace the BEP itself and the service parts inside the BEP ...

Страница 545: ...lacement R3 x and earlier NOTE BEP replacement requires a software reload Table 8 120 Manpower Time and Tools Manpower Time Tools One person 1 hour if all options are installed plus the time it takes to load the software excludes travel time Refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9 on page 8 5 ...

Страница 546: ...ER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS Beware that the Main Power Supply Extended Power Shutdown and BEP may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet 1 Record the system s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings 2 Back up the Patient Archive images Report Archive User Defined Configuration Customer Presets...

Страница 547: ...m the disk before returning the Hard Drive to the parts warehouse Follow your local policies CAUTION When the BEP door is open the Extended Power Shutdown circuit board is exposed When working inside the BEP remove the battery cable form J3 on the Extended Power Shutdown Otherwise the 24V battery will be exposed If you drop a tool or a screw on the Extended Power Shutdown you could short the batte...

Страница 548: ...n Release the lock connector for the BEP to Backplane cable J2 left on a MRX Configuration Keep the cable to transfer to the replacement BEP BEP Cable to Backplane J3 of GFI Configuration views inside the BEP BEP Cable to Backplane J2 left of MRX Configuration 6 Slide the entire BEP away from the system approximately one inch then finish removing the Printer Tray the entire BEP out of chassis and ...

Страница 549: ...move the following parts from the BEP if present to reinstall in the replacement BEP DVR Card Flex Jumper Cable SATA cable which goes between the DVR and Motherboard Patient I O filler Patient I O module Option Dongle Printer Tray Table 8 122 BEP removal R3 x and earlier Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 550: ... Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Reinstall the following parts from the BEP that was replaced all that were present DVR Card Flex Jumper Cable SATA cable which goes between the DVR and Motherboard Patient I O filler Patient I O module Option Dongle Printer Tray 2 Slide the BEP into the left side of the chassis frame 3 Install the two HEX key screws at the inside base of the BEP Torque 10 Nm 7 4 lbf ...

Страница 551: ...rnal BEP cable to the Backplane the system will power up but WILL NOT scan or WILL LAUNCH into simulator mode 6 Insert the bottom lip of the BEP cover inside the base of the BEP 7 Connect the Battery cable to J3 on the EPS and EPS to BEP cables to the EPS 8 MAKE SURE all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cab...

Страница 552: ...e two latches that clamp the Printer Tray to the top of the BEP 14 Slide the Black and White printer into the Printer Tray and connect the cables to the back of the printer 15 Tighten the Printer Tray wing nut to secure the printer 16 Connect all cables at the top of the BEP and all I O cables 17 Replace the covers 18 Reinstall Base Load and Application software 19 Enter the system s TCPIP setting...

Страница 553: ...ry does not come installed in the BEP FRU see 8 9 9 BEP Battery Pack replacement R4 x and later on page 8 239 to install transfer the battery into the new BEP Table 8 124 Manpower Time and Tools Manpower Time Tools One person 1 hour if all options are installed plus the time it takes to load the software excludes travel time Refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9 on page 8 5 ...

Страница 554: ...upply ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet 1 Record the system s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings 2 Back up the Patient Archive images Report Archive User Defined Configuration Customer Presets and Service settings You will perform a Restore after the install 3 Raise the Top Console to the highest position 4...

Страница 555: ...re returning the Hard Drive to the parts warehouse Follow your local policies CAUTION When the BEP door is open the ChargeBoard is exposed When working inside the BEP remove the battery cable from PCN1 on the ChargeBoard Otherwise the 24V battery will be exposed If you drop a tool or a screw on the Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard you could short the battery Permanent damage will be done if ...

Страница 556: ...e CB ChargeBoard must be unlocked to remove Disconnect the battery cable from PCN1 on the CB ChargeBoard the CB to the PB PowerBoard cable from PCN2 Place the BEP cover aside BEP6 CB cables 4 Remove the two 5 mm HEX key screws at the inside base of the BEP BEP Base HEX key screws Table 8 126 BEP removal R4 x and later Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 557: ...the Card Rack on a GFI Configuration using a BEP6 Keep the cable to transfer to the replacement BEP BEP Cable to Backplane J2 BEP6 BEP Cable to Backplane J3 of GFI Configuration view inside the BEP 6 Slide the entire BEP away from the system approximately one inch then finish removing the Printer Tray the entire BEP out of chassis and remove the BEP from the system Table 8 126 BEP removal R4 x and...

Страница 558: ...o reinstall in the replacement BEP Option Dongle Printer and or the Printer Tray or the Shear Wave Capacitor Pack if Shear Wave option is installed BackPlane to BEP cable Wireless Card and Antennas if present Patient I O if present S Video Card if present Shear Wave Capacitor Pack if present Table 8 126 BEP removal R4 x and later Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 559: ...side BEP6 CB cables 2 Re install the following parts into the replacement BEP Option Dongle Printer Tray and or the Printer or the Shear Wave Capacitor Pack if Shear Wave option was installed BackPlane to BEP cable Wireless Card and Antennas if present Patient I O if present S Video Card if present Shear Wave Capacitor Pack 3 Slide the BEP into the left side of the chassis frame 4 Install the two ...

Страница 560: ...ckplane J2 left on a MRX Configuration MAKE sure the BEP Cable to the Backplane for BEP6 is installed as shown DO NOT twist Or the Backplane cable J3 right and J5 PCIe to the Card Rack on a GFI Configuration using a BEP6 BEP Cable to MRX Backplane J2 BEP Cable to Backplane J3 of GFI Configuration view inside the BEP Table 8 127 BEP installation Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 561: ...s on the edge of the card rack and the three tabs insert into the slots on the top of the BEP frame The lip clamps the card rack and BEP together This is a tight fit 12 Lower the lower Column Cover Make sure the Column Cover is behind the Printer Tray 13 Position the Front Cover to engage the Column Cover stop tabs 14 Latch the two latches that clamp the Printer Tray to the top of the BEP 15 Slide...

Страница 562: ... is ready for use 1 Check Set Date Time and Timezone and set the Preset Region accordingly 2 Reconnect to the network 3 If the system was connected to InSite ExC restore the service settings backed up prior to the Base Load Reboot and verify remote connectivity 4 Confirm Patient Archive images Report Archive User Defined Configuration Customer Presets and Service settings are restored 5 Format a D...

Страница 563: ...REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS...

Страница 564: ... 5 Remove all cables connected to the I O Board and the Option Dongle 6 Remove the plug from J35 connector on the I O Board 7 Remove the cable from J36 Squeeze from the base of the connector to release the cable 8 Remove the plug from J20 by grabbing the metal connector not the flex cable and wiggling to gently remove 9 Remove J46 network cable Remember to release the tab to disconnect 10 Remove t...

Страница 565: ...100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 219 15 Reach inside the BEP frame to pop the I O Board toward you 16 Set the I O Board aside Table 8 131 BEP I O Board removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 566: ... the top 2 Loosely insert all five screws before tightening them 3 Re install the cables in the reverse order from when they were removed following the markings and re install the Option Dongle 4 Re install the HDD 5 Reconnect the I O cabling 6 Connect the Battery cable to J3 on the EPS 7 Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP NOTICE Be car...

Страница 567: ...ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF ...

Страница 568: ...c 1 Disconnect all I O cables and all cables at the top of the BEP 2 Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover or the three screws that attach the cover to the BEP Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP 3 Disconnect the battery cable from PCN1 the CB to PB cable from PCN2 Place the BEP cover aside BEP6 CB cables 4 Remove the Option Dongle on the I O Board inside the BE...

Страница 569: ...efully pull the I O Board out of the BEP making sure to avoid hitting components and circuit pins on both sides of the Board Pay attention to the installation guide pins and the slots in the bracket that need to be clear as I O Board and bracket are removed I O Board installation guides and slots 7 Set the I O Board aside Table 8 135 BEP Side I O Board removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 570: ...ard installation guides and slots 2 Re install the four screws and tighten securely 3 Re install the Option Dongle 4 Reconnect the I O cabling 5 Connect the battery cable to PCN1 and the CB to PB cable to PCN2 on the CB Make sure the cable connectors are locked into place on the CB connections 6 Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP NOTICE...

Страница 571: ... intended 8 9 5 5 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 137 BEP I O and Side I O replacement Functional Checks See Section...

Страница 572: ...1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE EPS EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN BATTERY AT J3 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS IS EXP...

Страница 573: ...s Corresponding Graphic 1 Loosen the thumb screw or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP 2 Disconnect the battery cable from J3 on the EPS Extended Power Shutdown Board the cables 1 connecting the EPS to the BEP Set the BEP cover aside inside of BEP Cover EPS and cables 3 Remove the screw that secures the HDD bracket ...

Страница 574: ...d Processor parts replacement 4 Swing the HDD bracket out Disconnect the cables connecting the HDD Lift the bracket up freeing the BEP HDD hinge tabs from the slots If the HDD has patient data leave the HDD at the site HDD hinge tabs Table 8 140 HDD removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 575: ...ables to the EPS 7 Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover 8 Tighten and secure the thumb screw s at the top of the BEP cover or the three screws that attach the cover to the BEP 9 Replace the side cover 10 Power up the system 11 Reinstall the Base Load and Applic...

Страница 576: ... THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE CHARGEBOARD BATTERY AT PCN1 ON THE CHARGEBOARD WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE CHARGEBOARD IS ...

Страница 577: ...ite Table 8 144 HDD removal Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover or the three screws that attach the cover to the BEP Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP 2 Disconnect the battery from PCN1 on the the CB ChargeBoard BEP6 CB cables 3 Disconnect HDD Power cable 1 and SATA cable 2 HDD cable connections ...

Страница 578: ...racket to the BEP frame HDD mounting screws 5 Pull slide the HDD out of the BEP and Bracket to the BEP frame Slight force may need to be applied since the HDD fits tightly into the BEP motherboard If the HDD has patient data leave the HDD at the site Note the HDD installation guides HDD removal HDD installation guides Table 8 144 HDD removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 579: ...ake sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the BEP cover 6 Tighten and secure the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover or the three screws that attach the cover to the BEP 7 Replace the side cover 8 Power up the system 9 Reinstall the Base Load and Application Softwar...

Страница 580: ...at it operates as intended 8 9 7 5 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 146 BEP HDD replacement Functional Checks See Sec...

Страница 581: ...TED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING THE WASTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE DISPOSED AS UNSORTED MUNICIPAL WASTE AND MUST BE COLLECTED SEPARATELY CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OR OTHER AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL COMPANY TO DECOMMISSION YOUR EQUIPMENT NOTICE Energy Control and ...

Страница 582: ... the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes 3 Remove Left Side cover Preparation Links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 Table 8 148 Preparations and Preparation Links Preparations you must perform the following steps ...

Страница 583: ...he top of the BEP cover away from the BEP 2 Disconnect the battery cable connecting to J3 on the EPS Position the cable connector into the opening of the battery cavity so the cable and battery can be easily removed Close BEP door and secure closed EPS Battery connection J3 3 Remove the four screws to the Battery Cover on the BEP cover Remove the Battery Pack Cover BEP Cover BEP Battery Pack Cover...

Страница 584: ...four screws that secure the Battery Pack Cover to the BEP cover Tighten screws securely 4 Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP 5 Connect the Battery cable to J3 on the EPS 6 Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP NOTICE Be careful not t...

Страница 585: ...ARTS ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING CONTACT IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE CAPACITOR PACK ARE OFF BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE CAPACITOR PACK CABLES WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STR...

Страница 586: ...URN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE CHARGEBOARD BATTERY AT PCN1 ON THE CHARGEBOARD WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS Beware that the Main Power Supply ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet 1 Power down the system 2 Disconnect the mains power cable...

Страница 587: ...e BEP Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP 2 Disconnect the battery from PCN1 on the the CB ChargeBoard Position the cable connector into the opening of the battery cavity so the cable and battery can be easily removed Close BEP door and secure closed BEP6 CB cables 3 Remove the four screws to the Battery Cover on the BEP cover Remove the Battery Pack Cover BEP Cover BEP Battery Pack Co...

Страница 588: ...e four screws that secure the Battery Pack Cover to the BEP cover Tighten screws securely 4 Loosen the thumb screws or screws at the top of the BEP cover that attach the cover to the BEP Tilt the top of the BEP cover away from the BEP 5 Connect the battery cable to PCN1 on the CB 6 Make sure all cables are clear of the BEP Cover and tilt the top of the BEP cover toward the BEP NOTICE Be careful no...

Страница 589: ...as intended 8 9 9 5 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 155 BEP Battery Pack replacement Functional Checks See Section F...

Страница 590: ...ontrol and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE...

Страница 591: ...als Printer Power to BEP and USB on top of the Main PS Remove the three screws 3 that secure the Main PS using a 5 mm Allen wrench Ease the Main PS away from the fang bracket 4 Pull slide the entire Main PS backwards until the connectors to the Card Cage Backplane are unseated NOTE If the 4D MC option is installed proceed to Step 2 If not proceed to Step 3 NOTE If the Shear Wave option is installe...

Страница 592: ...m J28 on the BEP The 4D MC will also have to be transferred to the replacement PS See Section 8 10 4 4D Motor Controller 4D MC replacement on page 8 256 2 Ease the PS away from the fang bracket Pull slide the entire PS backwards until the connectors to the Card Cage Backplane are unseated Lift the PS away Table 8 158 Main Power Supply PS removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 593: ...lacement PS Table 8 159 Main PS installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Make sure the GFI PCIe cable is routed behind the Main PS fang GFI Configuration only MRX does not use this cable Slide the Main PS 1 forward to seat the connectors 2 on the Card Cage Engage the tab onto the Fang from where it was removed Install the three screws 3 that secure the Main PS using a 5 mm Allen wrench Torque 10...

Страница 594: ...apacitor Pack Cherokee Mitra PS connectors Lambda PS connectors without Shear Wave option R4 and earlier Lambda PS connectors with Shear Wave option R5 and later PCIe Cable routed between Card Cage and Targa right side view GFI Configuration only MRX does not use this cable 2 Install the Rear Cover Top Cover and Side Covers 3 Perform Functional Checks See 8 10 2 3 Calibration and adjustments 8 10 ...

Страница 595: ...s to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 160 Main Power Supply replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up LOGIQ E9 Service Manu...

Страница 596: ...n on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 4 Top Cover replacement on page 8 38 8 5 11 Rear Cover replacement on page 8 54 8 10 2 Main Power Supply replacement on page 8 244 NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL O...

Страница 597: ... Fan Assembly Removal Step Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove the Main Power Supply Remove the five screws Torx T10 screw head securing the Fan Assembly to the PS DO NOT discard the screws Slide the Fan Assembly away from the PS Rear view of the PS Inside view of the PS 1 Disconnect the Fan Assembly connectors three white plastic connectors from the PS to remove the assembly ...

Страница 598: ...ttach a tie wrap b to the connector cables to position the cables in the center of Fan 2 c Trim the end of the tie wrap NOTE The tie wraps are necessary to position the cables between the heatsink and the module when the Fan Assembly is placed into the PS 2 Position the Fan Assembly under the PS as shown to ease connecting the connectors to the PS Connect the Fan Assembly connectors to PS the fan ...

Страница 599: ...ach a second tie wrap Position the tie wrap 3 to 5 cm 1 19 to 1 96 inches from the end of the cable sleeves Trim the end of the tie wrap 4 Position the wire tied cables between the heatsink a and the module b before placing the Fan Assembly into the PS Table 8 162 Installing the replacement Fan Assembly Step Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 600: ...e screws removed earlier to secure the Fan Assembly to the Power Supply PS Inside view of the PS Rear view of the PS 6 Perform Functional Checks See 8 10 3 6 Calibration and adjustments 8 10 3 7 Verification and 8 10 3 8 Functional Checks on page 8 255 Table 8 162 Installing the replacement Fan Assembly Step Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 601: ...he following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 163 Main Power Supply Fan Assembly replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 ...

Страница 602: ...s present Follow these links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 11 Rear Cover replacement on page 8 54 8 10 2 Main Power Supply replacement on page 8 244 NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 U...

Страница 603: ...tifying the Main Power Supply PS Table 8 164 Identifying the Main PS and connectors Cherokee Mitra PS Lambda PS PS Label rear bottom of PS earlier and current production labels shown PS connectors top of PS PS Label rear bottom of PS PS connectors without Shear Wave option R4 and earlier top of PS PS connectors with Shear Wave option R5 and later ...

Страница 604: ... Graphic 1 Locate the 4D Motor Controller on the back of the Main PS Remove the five screws circled securing the 4D MC Cover to the Main PS Slide cover off to access the 4D MC 4D MC Cover removed 2 Disconnect the USB Cable 1 and the Flex Cable 2 from the PS DO NOT pull from the ribbon to remove Only pull from the connector Remove two screws circled and slide the board away to remove the 4D Motor C...

Страница 605: ...s location in the Main PS and install the two screws circled supplied with the replacement Make sure the Flex Cable to the Controller Card lies behind the Flex Cable from the Main PS as shown Connect the Flex Cable 2 to the Main PS and 4D MC NOTE The replacement 4D MC includes a two USB Cables the shorter USB Cable must be used for a Cherokee Mitra PS Connect the shorter USB Cable 1 to the 4D MC N...

Страница 606: ... shown Use the P Clamp Screw and Washer supplied with the 4D MC replacement to secure the USB Cable to the PS 3 Install the five screws circled to secure the 4D MC Cover to the Main PS Make sure the P Clamp for the 4D MC USB Cable is not twisted It should be aligned with the Main PS Table 8 166 4D MC Reinstallation for Cherokee Mitra PS Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 607: ...from the Main PS between the BEP and the Targa frame and then feed the USB cable through the gap prior to fastening the Main PS to the Targa frame Check that the GFI PCIe cable between the rear of the Card Cage 2 and the Targa frame 3 NOTE If applicable only on GFI Card Rack configuration Side view of the PCIe Cable routed between the Card Cage and Targa GFI Configuration only MRX does not use thi...

Страница 608: ...tall the rear Cover Install the Side Covers Record VPD information for 4D Motor Controller For information on updating VPD see 8 4 7 2 Verify and Update Vital Product Data on page 8 28 7 Perform Functional Checks See 8 10 4 5 Calibration and adjustments 8 10 4 6 Verification and 8 10 4 7 Functional Checks on page 8 268 Table 8 166 4D MC Reinstallation for Cherokee Mitra PS Steps Corresponding Grap...

Страница 609: ...teps Corresponding Graphic 1 Locate the 4D MC Cover on the back of the Main PS Remove the three screws from the 4D MC Cover DO NOT discard Gently slide the 4D MC Cover and the 4D MC out of the PS 2 Remove the two screws circled that secure the 4D MC to the 4D MC Cover Discard Note how the 4D MC USB Cable is routed for installation 3 Disconnect the USB Cable from J28 on the BEP ...

Страница 610: ...ement 4D MC to secure the 4D MC to the 4D MC Cover NOTE The replacement 4D MC includes a two USB Cables the longer USB Cable must be used for a Lambda PS Connect the long USB Cable to the 4D MC Route the cable as shown 2 Insert the 4D MC and cover into the PS along the mounting rails circled NOTE There are four mounting rails two at the top circled and two in the bottom Make sure all are aligned t...

Страница 611: ...ush on the 4D MC Cover until it is seated in place connected to the PS Make sure the USB Cable is still in the correct position Reinstall the three 4D MC Cover screws 4 Put the Main PS into position so it will be ready to be mounted Route the USB cable between the Targa frame and the BEP Table 8 168 4D MC Reinstallation for Lambda PS Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 612: ... 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 266 Section 8 10 Main Power Supply parts replacement 5 Connect the USB Cable from the 4D MC to J28 on the BEP Table 8 168 4D MC Reinstallation for Lambda PS Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 613: ...at the GFI PCIe cable between the rear of the Card Cage 2 and the Targa frame 3 NOTE If applicable only on GFI Card Rack configuration Side view of the PCIe Cable routed between the Card Cage and Targa GFI Configuration only MRX does not use this cable 7 Install the Rear Cover and Side Covers Record VPD information for 4D Motor Controller For information on updating VPD see 8 4 7 2 Verify and Upda...

Страница 614: ... confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 169 4D Motor Controller Cherokee Power Supply replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON Boot Up L...

Страница 615: ...N 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 269 Section 8 11 Peripherals replacement 8 11 1 Purpose of this section Follow the instructions in this section to replace peripherals ...

Страница 616: ...S EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN BATTERY AT J3 OR THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE EPS OR CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS Beware that the Main Power Supply Extended Power Shutdown or ChargeBoard and BEP may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet WARNING WARN...

Страница 617: ...until the Column Cover stop tabs clear 4 Raise the Column Cover 3 to access and remove any screws securing the left side of the DVD drive to the DVD V Nav Bay Bird bracket 8 11 3 5 DVD R W drive installation 1 Slide the DVD drive into position 2 Seat the DVD Interface Board Bracket to the DVD Drive 3 Install the four screws to secure the DVD drive to the DVD Interface Board Bracket 4 Install the s...

Страница 618: ...orm the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 170 DVD R W drive replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debrief Script 4 2 2 Power ON...

Страница 619: ...r replacement on page 8 38 8 11 3 DVD R W drive replacement on page 8 270 NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERI...

Страница 620: ...Remove the four screws securing the storage drawer to the LOGIQ E9 Discard the screws and drawer in the appropriate manner Table 8 172 Storage Drawer Installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Slide the Storage Drawer into the System Secure the Storage Drawer to the LOGIQ E9 with the four supplied screws 1 Perform Functional Checks See 8 11 4 6 Calibration and adjustments 8 11 4 7 Verification and...

Страница 621: ... Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 173 DVD Storage Tray replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Deb...

Страница 622: ... 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE EPS EXTENDED POWER SHUTDOWN BATTERY AT J3 OR THE BATTERY FROM THE CHARGEBOARD AT PCN1 WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS O...

Страница 623: ...the V Nav module 3 Raise the Column Cover to access and remove the four screws securing the left side of the V Nav module 4 Slide the V Nav module out the front of the system 8 11 5 5 V Nav module installation 1 Slide the V Nav module into position 2 Install the eight screws to secure the V Nav module 3 Connect the cables to the V Nav module 4 Install the DVD drive if necessary 5 Return the Column...

Страница 624: ...dule 8 11 5 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 174 V Nav module replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional ...

Страница 625: ...ower shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 11 6 4 Black and White Digital Graphic Printer removal 1 Disconnect the cables from the back of the printer 2 Loosen the Printer Tray wing nut that secures the printer 3 Slide the printer out 8 11 6 5 Black and White Digital Graphic Printer installation 1 Slide the printer into the Printer Tray until the face is flush with the...

Страница 626: ...m the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 175 Black and White Digital Graphic Printer replacement Functional Checks See Section Functional Check Debri...

Страница 627: ...t on page 8 38 8 11 6 Digital Graphic Printer replacement on page 8 279 NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY...

Страница 628: ...e top of the BEP Be sure the lip on the underside of the bracket hooks on the edge of the card rack and the three tabs insert into the slots on the top of the BEP frame The lip clamps the card rack and BEP together This is a tight fit 2 Lower the lower Column Cover 3 Position the Main Console Front Cover to engage the lower Column Cover stop tabs 4 Latch the two latches that clamp the Printer Tray...

Страница 629: ...es as intended 8 11 7 8 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 176 Printer Tray replacement Functional Checks See Section F...

Страница 630: ...OWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF 5 DISCONNECT THE CHARGEBOARD BATTERY AT PCN1 ON THE CHARGEBOARD WHEN WORKING IN THE BEP THIS SHOULD BE DONE WHENEVER THE BEP IS OPEN AND THE CHARGEBOARD IS EXPOSED AND CHANGING PARTS Beware that the Main Power Supply Charge...

Страница 631: ... Bracket removal Table 8 179 Printer Bracket removal Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Disconnect the Power and USB Cables from the Printer 2 Remove the two screws that secure the Bracket and Printer to the Printer Mount 3 Remove the Top Cover 4 Remove the four screws that secure the Printer to the Printer Bracket ...

Страница 632: ...IQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 286 Section 8 11 Peripherals replacement 5 Cut the Cable Tie Mount Remove the two T30 torx screws the secure the Bracket Printer Mount to the Z Mech Table 8 179 Printer Bracket removal Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 633: ... top of the Targa Remove the Cable Tie Mount from the top of the Targa Frame 2 Remove the two T30 torx screws that secure the Z Mechanism to the Targa 3 Route the Printer Cables as shown Route the Power Cable as shown and the USB Cable on top of the Targa along the inside edge of the Rear Handle Continue to route the USB Cable inside the Targa to J26 on the BEP 4 Reinstall the Rear but DO NOT inst...

Страница 634: ...cond M6 External Toothed Lock Washer provided in the Kit Torque 4 3 Nm 3 2 lbf ft 38 lbf in Remove the liner from the Cable Tie Mount position as shown and press firmly into place as shown Secure the Drive Gear Assembly power cable to the Cable Tie Mount Trim the excess Cable Tie 7 Reinstall the Top Cover but DO NOT install the screws MAKE SURE the Printer USB and Power Cables are routed properly ...

Страница 635: ...our M3 0 5 X6mm long screws and four M3 internal tooth lock washers provided in the kit Torque 0 55 Nm 0 4 lbf ft 4 9 lbf in 9 Insert the Bracket and Printer onto Bracket Printer Mount and secure with the two M5 0 8 X10mm long screws and two M5 internal tooth lock washers provided in the kit Torque 3 Nm 2 2 lbf ft 26 5 lbf in Table 8 180 Printer Bracket installation Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 636: ...10 Connect the Power and USB Cables to the Printer 11 Any slack on the cables can be pushed in at this point Secure the Rear and Top Cover MAKE SURE the Cables DO NOT get pinched Cables positioned correctly 12 Reinstall Side Covers Table 8 180 Printer Bracket installation Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 637: ...es as intended 8 11 8 5 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 181 Printer Tray replacement Functional Checks See Section F...

Страница 638: ...INDICATORS THE CAPACITOR MODULE HAS LEDS TO INDICATE IF THE CAPACITORS ARE CHARGED OR NOT ONLY REMOVE THE CABLES WHEN LEDS ARE OFF DISCHARGE TIMES 4 7 SECONDS AFTER NORMAL SHUTDOWN IF CABLES ARE PULLED WHILE THE SYSTEM IS ON IT TAKES TYPICALLY 40 SECONDS TO REACH 60 VOLTS AND 5 MINUTES TO FULLY DISCHARGE 0 VOLTS DO NOT PLUG OR UNPLUG CABLES WHEN THE POWER IS ON ONLY PLUG OR UNPLUG CABLES WHEN THE ...

Страница 639: ...e Capacitor Pack to discharge LEDs OFF 4 Remove the Left Side cover the Top Cover and WLAN Antennas if present 5 Remove the Capacitor Pack Preparation Links if you need more information 4 2 3 Power shut down on page 4 7 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 30 8 5 4 Top Cover replacement on page 8 38 Table 8 183 Preparations and Preparation Links Preparations you must perform the following steps...

Страница 640: ... Capacitor Pack is removed and attaches to the BEP in the same manner as the Printer Tray Table 8 184 Capacitor Pack removal Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Raise the console height to the highest level 2 If the LOGIQ E9 has WLAN remove the Antennas on the top of the BEP 3 Disconnect the power cable from the Main Power Supply to the Capacitor Pack BCM1 and BCM2 ...

Страница 641: ... tabs 3 clear and slide the Shear Wave Console Cover Assembly 4 out Lift the Column Cover Assembly Push the Capacitor Pack toward the Card Cage approximately 1 2 inch to free the Pack the BEP Remove the Capacitor Pack Table 8 185 Capacitor Pack Installation Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Place the Capacitor Pack on top of the BEP Reconnect the power cable from the Main Power Supply to the Pack BCM1...

Страница 642: ...ight fit Lower the lower Column Cover Slide the Shear Wave Console Cover Assembly 4 into the console Position the Main Console Front Cover to engage the lower Column Cover stop tabs 3 Latch the two latches 1 that clamp the Pack to the top of the BEP 3 Reinstall the Antennas on the top of the BEP if the Attunes were removed 4 Replace the covers 5 Perform Functional Checks See 8 11 9 3 Calibration a...

Страница 643: ...nded 8 11 9 5 Functional Checks Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use Table 8 186 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement Functional Checks See Sectio...

Страница 644: ... 30 minutes Refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E9 on page 8 5 Table 8 188 Preparations and Preparation Links Preparations you must perform the following steps NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE SCANNER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POW...

Страница 645: ...MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 299 8 12 1 Parts Reference Roll Stand Figure 8 71 Volume Navigation Roll Stand Installation Kit See Table 8 189 Volume Navigation Roll Stand Installation Kit Parts Reference on page 8 300 for item description ...

Страница 646: ...ion Kit Parts Reference Item Description Quantity 1 Roll Stand Post 60 inches 1 2 Roll Stand Base with 21 lb Counterweight 1 3 5 16 18 x 1 inch Hex Head Cap Screw HHCS 1 4 5 16 Flat Washer 1 5 5 16 Split Lock Washer 1 6 GE Volume Navigation Arm 1 7 Cord Loop Hook 1 8 Utility Basket 1 9 Handle 1 10 Track Cover 12 inches 3 11 Cover Plate 1 not shown 1 4 20 x 3 8 inch Socket Head Cap Screw SHCS 4 not...

Страница 647: ...Use these instructions to assembled or replace the Roll Stand 1 Insert the post in the base The locator pin ensures correct alignment 2 Using the 1 2 inch socket wrench provided fasten the post to the base with the hardware shown Figure 8 72 Post into Base 1 5 16 fLAT Washer 2 5 16 Lock Washer 3 5 16 18 x 1 inch Screw Roll Stand only 1 2 3 ...

Страница 648: ... cord loop hook basket and handle into the rear channel in the order shown 4 Using the hex wrenches provided tighten all of the set screws in each accessory to secure the po sition in the track a Tighten the top four set screws with the 3 32 inch hex wrench b Tighten the center four set screws with the 1 8 inch hex wrench c Tighten the bottom two set screws with 3 32 inch hex wrench Figure 8 73 Po...

Страница 649: ...5 Loosen the knob slightly guide the arm into the channel and move it to the mounting position NOTE Make sure the Transformer Support Platform larger view in Figure 8 74 Loosening Knob on page 8 303 is installed in the UP position NOTE The channel fits between the front and rear slide plates Figure 8 74 Loosening Knob Figure 8 75 Channel Location ...

Страница 650: ...rough the cable clips 2 on the top side of the arm 8 While supporting the arm loaded with the transmitter slowly loosen the knob which allows the arm to gradually move down the channel NOTE The arm must move down the channel very slowly when the knob is loosened and it must move easily upward when the lifting arm is in the channel If the arm free falls or will not move follow the adjustment proced...

Страница 651: ...apter 8 Replacement procedures 8 305 8 12 2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand cont d 9 Using the 3 16 inch hex wrench provided fasten the cover plate to the top of the post with four 4 1 4 20 x 3 8 inch SHCS as shown Figure 8 77 Cover Plate Installation ...

Страница 652: ...AL 8 306 Section 8 12 V Nav Roll Stand and or On Board Stand Installation and or Replacement 8 12 2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand cont d 10 Snap the three Rear Track Covers into place in locations shown Figure 8 78 Rear Track Covers Installation ...

Страница 653: ...0 On Board V Nav Stand Installation Kit description Item Description Qty 1 V Nav Column Cord Hook Channel Cover and Column Mounting Hardware for Mounting Hardware details see Figure 8 80 V Nav Column Mounting Hardware on page 8 308 1 2 V Nav Arm Transformer Support 1 3 Right Side Cover without GE Logo 1 4 Rear Cover Reaming Tool 1 5 5443897 100 LOGIQ E9 Ver R4 Option Installation Instructions V NA...

Страница 654: ...Table 8 191 V Nav Column Mounting Hardware description only hardware is listed Item Description Qty 3 Socket Head Cap Screw SHCS for Cover Plate top and bottom NOTE These screws require a 3 16 inch Allen wrench 8 4 V Nav Column to LOGIQ E9 Mounting Plate 1 5 Socket Head Cap Screw SHCS to mount V Nav Column to Mounting Plate 6 6 Screws to mount the Mounting Plate 3 7a 7c V Nav Column Stand off Fast...

Страница 655: ...ew SHCS x6 to mount Stand Post to Mounting Plate 6 Screws x3 to mount the Mounting Plate 7a V NAV Stand Post Stand off Fastener to Targa long top x1 7b V NAV Stand Post Stand off Fastener to Targa medium center x1 7c V NAV Stand Post Stand off Fastener to Targa short bottom x1 8 LOGIQ E9 Targa not part of the kit 9 access hole to Item 5 in stand post 10 Cover Plate groove in stand post Cover Plate...

Страница 656: ...bling Option to LOGIQ E9 on page 8 309 Table 8 193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9 Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove Grounding Plug center and the Rear Cover mounting screws 2 Install the V NAV Stand Post Stand off Fasteners 7a 7c to Targa short in the bottom and long in the top Tighten securely NOTE The Rear Cover mounting flange should not get pinched by the Stand off Fasteners Two of the Sta...

Страница 657: ...o Stand off Fasteners with the three screws 6 Tighten securely 4 NOTE The bottom cover plate should be installed first see Step 8 The Stand Post Mounting Plate seats in a cut out channel at the base off the post V Nav Arm Stand Mounting Plate channel Table 8 193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9 Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Страница 658: ...of the six screws 5 at the top first DO NOT tighten completely Install the remaining screws loosely Tighten in a sequence Top front bottom rear and center Then the remaining in a sequence Torque 9 8 Nm 7 2 lbf ft 86 7 lbf in 6 Insert the Track Cover into the Track Cover groove and slide it the lowest position to cover the Stand mounting access holes Table 8 193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9 Step...

Страница 659: ...e Transformer Support Platform is up as shown The channel fits between the front and rear slide plates Tighten the knob to lock the arm into position Loosening Knob Channel Location 8 Fasten the Cover Plate 2 to the top of the post 1 with the four SHCS 3 as shown Repeat step for the bottom Cover Plate if not previously installed Table 8 193 Option Installation to LOGIQ E9 Steps Corresponding Graph...

Страница 660: ...very slowly when the knob is loosened and it must move easily upward when lifting If the arm free falls or will not move follow the adjustment procedure see 8 12 6 Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism on page 8 314 Table 8 194 Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Remove the plastic bolt cap from the lower tension nut The clamping knob must be unlocked while making...

Страница 661: ...al checks to confirm the LOGIQ E9 is operational before returning the LOGIQ E9 to the customer If all are successful include the following debrief script LOGIQ E9 Service Manual Direction 5535208 100 Rev 2 Equipment passed all required checks and is ready for use NOTE Be sure to inform the customer that the On Board V Nav Stand SHOULD NOT be used to push the LOGIQ E9 Table 8 195 Side Covers replac...

Страница 662: ...ot use steel wool or other abrasive material to clean the mounting assembly 4 The damage caused by the use of unapproved substances or processes will not be covered by warranty It is recommended to testing any cleaning solution on a small area of the mounting assembly that is not visible to verify compatibility 5 Never submerge the roll stand nor allow liquids to enter the mounting assemblies Wipe...

Страница 663: ...ter gives you an overview of the available Spare Parts for LOGIQ E9 In addition upgrade kits and probes that may be used on LOGIQ E9 is listed Section 9 2 Definitions of Left Rear Back Right and Front Figure 9 1 illustrates what is the Left Side 1 Rear Back 2 Right Side 3 and Front 4 of the system Figure 9 1 Definition of Left Right Front and Back of LOGIQ E9 3 2 1 4 ...

Страница 664: ...TROLLER AC POWER ACT AC TRANSFORMER ASSY ASSEMBLY BEP BACK END PROCESSOR CTRL CONTROL EXT EXTERNAL FRU Y REPLACEMENT PART FRU N NON STOCK PART I O INPUT OUTPUT INT INTERNAL LCD LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY OP OPERATOR PANEL PC PERSONAL COMPUTER Back End Processor PS POWER SUPPLY PWA PRINTED WIRE ASSEMBLY QTY QUANTITY USED PER SCANNER RT3D REAL TIME THREE DIMENSIONAL Same as 4D RX RECEIVER SWAVE SHEAR WA...

Страница 665: ...ble 9 21 Card Rack parts 9 48 Table 9 27 Back End Processor parts for R3 x and earlier 9 64 Table 9 28 Back End Processor parts for R4 x and later 9 68 Table 9 30 Power Supply parts 9 72 Table 9 31 Printer 9 77 Table 9 32 Digital Video Disc DVD parts 9 79 Table 9 36 Mains Power Cables 9 82 Table 9 37 Top Console cables 9 86 Table 9 38 XYZ Motor Brake Control cables 9 87 Table 9 39 Main Power Suppl...

Страница 666: ...grade Options CONSOLE MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE VERSION Phase I BT2010 BT2011 BT2013 BT2014 1 0 3 1 0 4 1 0 5 1 0 6 2 0 3 2 0 4 2 0 5 3 1 2 3 1 3 4 Rev x x 5 Rev x x 5205000 LOGIQ E9 00 240 VAC Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC Y Y Y Y U U U U U U U 5205000 3 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC N N N N Y Y Y U U U U 5205000 4 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC N N N N Y Y Y U U U U 5205000 5 LOGIQ E...

Страница 667: ...R1 0 5 5193239 6 4 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R1 0 6 5193239 8 5 LOGIQ E9 System Software 5135124 20 6 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R2 0 3 5193239 12 See Table 9 6 R2 0 xSoftware Matrix on page 9 7 1 Y 7 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R2 0 4 5193239 13 8 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R2 0 5 5193239 16 9 LOGIQ E9 System Software 5135124 30 10 LOGIQ E9 BIOS Blaster CD 5212471 For BEP with Extende...

Страница 668: ...re Matrix on page 9 8 17 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R4 Rev 1 1 5454367 2 18 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R4 Rev 1 2 5454367 3 19 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R4 Rev 2 0 5454367 4 20 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R4 Rev 2 1 5454367 5 21 LOGIQ E9 Application Software R4 Rev 3 0 5454367 6 5454367 7 22 LOGIQ E9 Base Image Load BEP6 1 5437603 23 Ichiro R4 BEP 6 1 BIOS 5439364 Compatible with BEP6 ...

Страница 669: ...usability and Cost reduction DRX 3 1 P N 5301040 4 and Backplane P N GA200685 boards support 5193239 8 Table 9 6 R2 0 xSoftware Matrix Breakthrough Application Software Version Application Part Number BEP 5145000 2 Base Load Part Number LOGIQ E9 BT10 R2 0 3 Initial Production Release also included in FMI 70205 5193239 12 5135124 30 R 2 0 4 Full Production Release Support the relocation of the Opti...

Страница 670: ...00 GFI 5205000 2 GFI 5205000 3 GFI 5205000 4 GFI 5205000 5 MRX 5205000 6 MRX R3 1 2 5193239 22 5390139 R3 1 3 5193239 23 Table 9 8 R4 x Software Matrix CONSOLE MODEL NUMBER APPLICATION SOFTWARE VERSION APPLICATION SOFTWARE PART NUMBER R4 BEP BASE LOAD PART NUMBER 5205000 7 Version 4 Rev 1 0 5454367 5437603 Version R4 Rev 1 1 5454367 2 Version R4 Rev 1 2 5454367 3 Version R4 Rev 2 0 5454367 4 Versi...

Страница 671: ...s and Bumpers Figure 9 2 Covers LOGIQ E9 Table 9 10 Covers LOGIQ E9 1 of 8 not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9 2 on page 9 9 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1a Bumper Rear GA307008 2 1 Y 2a Filter Cover GA307515 2 1 Y 3a 5a 8a 4a 9a 11a 12a 1a 10a 2a 14a 6a 7a 13a ...

Страница 672: ...placed by 5337050 1 Y Cover Left Assembly with Logo 5337050 1 Y Cover Left Assembly with Sapphire Logo 5337050 2 1 Y 4a Top Cover GA307023 Top Cover 1 Y 5a Handle Rear GA307029 2 1 Y Table 9 10 Covers LOGIQ E9 2 of 8 not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9 2 on page 9 9 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 673: ...r Handle Right Top 5178793 1 Y Cover Handle Right Lower 5178474 1 Y 7a Cover Handle Left Top 5178193 1 Y Cover Handle Left Lower 5178242 1 Y Table 9 10 Covers LOGIQ E9 3 of 8 not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9 2 on page 9 9 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 674: ...ith Logo 5337049 Right Side Cover Assembly 1 Y Cover Right Assembly with Slots On board V Nav Stand Light Grey and Sapphire GE Logo 5436706 1 Y Cover Right Assembly with Sapphire Logo 5337049 2 1 Y Right Side Cover Assy Removable Fan Tray 5168191 2 1 Y Table 9 10 Covers LOGIQ E9 4 of 8 not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9 2 on page 9 9 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QT...

Страница 675: ...d by GA307056 10 1 Y Cover Plate Connectors GA307056 10 Replaces by GA307056 1 Y Label Probe Connectors LOGIQ E9 5328860 This label is required when replacing Cover Plate Connectors 1 Y 10a Footrest Bumper 5311121 1 Y Table 9 10 Covers LOGIQ E9 5 of 8 not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9 2 on page 9 9 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 676: ...s not include the Back Cover Label Contact the Online Center to request specific label 1 Y 12a Cable Hook GA307047 2 Y 13a Bumper Boss Z Outer GA307188 1 Y 14a Door I O Panel GA307046 1 Y Table 9 10 Covers LOGIQ E9 6 of 8 not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9 2 on page 9 9 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 677: ...ed Fan Tray Cover 5480408 1 Y Shear Wave Console Cover Assembly Option 5497692 1 Y Column Cover Assembly GA200359 1 Y Cover Main Cable GA307192 1 Y Table 9 10 Covers LOGIQ E9 7 of 8 not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9 2 on page 9 9 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 678: ...ay Storage Drawer 5267580 2 Replaced by 5267580 3 1 Y Drive Bay Storage Drawer 5267580 3 1 Y 15 LOGIQ E9 Printer Bracket Kit 5537450 1 Bracket Printer Mount 2 Bracket Printer 3 Adhesive Mount Cable Tie plus mounting hardware not shown 1 Y Table 9 10 Covers LOGIQ E9 8 of 8 not all covers or items listed are identified in Figure 9 2 on page 9 9 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 3 1 2 ...

Страница 679: ... require to be replaced Refer to the Operator Panel FRUS and for sub FRU servicing options see Table 9 13 Operator Panel Compatible Configurations on page 9 36 Table 9 11 Top Console parts 1 of 18 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 19 LCD Monitor 5205000 6 and earlier consoles 5167953 1 Y 2 LCD Arm with Cable 5205000 6 and earlier consoles 5183750 1 Y 3 19 LCD Monitor V2 5205000 7 an...

Страница 680: ... Adapter Spare Kit 5455428 Used on 5415182 20 Arm 1 LCD Arm Adapter LOGIQ E9 2 LCD Arm Neck Base Plate 3 Ground Lead LOGIQ E9 LCD Arm Adapter Hex Socket Head Cap Screw M5 0 8 X50mm Long External Toothed Lock Washer Pan Head Machine Screw M4 0 7 X6mm Long hardware not shown 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts 2 of 18 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 3 2 ...

Страница 681: ...over x1 7 third Arm Cover x1 1 Y 7 Ultrasound Global LCD Arm LOGIQ E9 which has Adapter 5205000 8 and later consoles 5957000 110 1 Y 8 LCD Arm Plastic Covers 5205000 8 and later consoles 5957000 1 Contains 1 Pan Arm Down Cover 2 Lift Arm Cover Right 3 Lift Arm Cover Left 4 Joint Cover 5 Extension Arm Cover 6 Rotation Limit Screw 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts 3 of 18 Continued ITEM PART NAME PAR...

Страница 682: ...ble 9 13 Operator Panel Compatible Configurations on page 9 36 1 y 12 Frame with LED Backlight LCD and Touchscreen Spare Part 5207000 65 See Table 9 13 Operator Panel Compatible Configurations on page 9 36 Front Rear 1 y 13 R5 LOGIQ E9 Upper Operator Panel Frame and LCD Assembly 5497858 20 See Table 9 13 Operator Panel Compatible Configurations on page 9 36 Front Rear 1 Y 14 Operator Panel Assembl...

Страница 683: ...Table 9 13 Operator Panel Compatible Configurations on page 9 36 1 Y 18 Operator Panel Assembly Upper 5207000 43 Replaced by 5207000 53 See Table 9 13 Operator Panel Compatible Configurations on page 9 36 1 Y 19 High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable Upper Operator Panel 5207000 6 Replaces GA200442 on 5207000 33 Op Panel Upper or later See Table 9 14 Upper Op Panel FRUs Compatible Configurations o...

Страница 684: ...4 Upper Op Panel FRUs Compatible Configurations on page 9 37 1 Y 24 LED Backlight Driver with Cables Spare Part 5207000 64 See Table 9 14 Upper Op Panel FRUs Compatible Configurations on page 9 37 1 Y 25 Upper Bezel 5207000 15 1 Y 26 USB Cover Operator Panel 5207000 54 1 Y 27 TGC Slide Pots Dust Gasket 5207000 55 1 Y 28 USB Connector Board Upper Operator Panel GA200441 To become obsolete If unavai...

Страница 685: ...nel Customer USB Port Cable Assembly 5497858 30 1 Y 33 Main Ctrl Board w USB Video Bd and Cable Upper Operator Panel GA200718 Use only with USB Connector Board GA200717 GA200441 will not work Replaced by 5207000 30 1 Y 34 Main Ctrl Board w USB Video Bd and Cable Upper Operator Panel 5207000 30 OBSOLETE Has USB over current fix Replaces GA200718 1 Y 35 Main Ctrl Board with USB Video Board and Cable...

Страница 686: ...2 Operator Panel Assembly Lower with Improved Trackball 5207000 12 OBSOLETE Replaced by 5207000 32 1 Y 43 Operator Panel Assembly Lower Without Trackball 5207000 32 OBSOLETE Remove existing trackball from removed lower panel and install into the new assembly Second opinion required To become obsolete If unavailable order 5207000 42 1 Y 44 Operator Panel Assembly Lower Without Trackball 5207000 42 ...

Страница 687: ...1 Y 50 Operator Panel Frame Assembly Lower 5195937 1 Y 51 Inductive Trackball GA200444 OBSOLETE Replaced by 5207000 5 1 Y 52 Improved Inductive Trackball 5207000 5 To become obsolete If unavailable order 5341631 1 Y 53 Optical Trackball 5341631 Replaced 5207000 5 1 Y 54 Trackball Removable 5393439 10 Table 9 11 Top Console parts 9 of 18 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU P2 P...

Страница 688: ... Key Pivot Points 5207000 80 57 Concentric Encoder 2404652 19 OBSOLETE Replaced by 5207000 85 4 Y 58 Encoder Concentric Shaft with 0 ring 5207000 85 for Operator Panel 4 Y 59 Joystick Encoder 5207000 17 OBSOLETE for Operator Panel 8 Y 60 Joystick Encoder 5207000 29 Replaces 5207000 17 8 Y 61 Lower Operator Panel Main board 5207000 18 Obsolete replaced by 5207000 28 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts...

Страница 689: ...sion with reduced LED number Replaced by 520700 38 1 Y 63 LE9 Lower Circuit Board for OP Panel Bourns Slide Pots spare part only 5207000 38 See Table 9 13 Operator Panel Compatible Configurations on page 9 36 Includes 1 Left Elastomer 2 Right Elastomer 3 Slide Pot Gasket 4 Switch PCB and 5 BOURNS compatible Slide Pot knobs x8 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts 11 of 18 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART ...

Страница 690: ... by 5207000 24 1 Y 69 Button Cap Kit 5207000 16 OBSOLETE Replaced by 5207000 24 Includes keycaps for options in R2 x x or later 1 Y 70 Button Cap Kit includes B Flow Key 5207000 24 1 Y 71 Knob Kit Slide Pot Knob Kit Mode Select Knob Kit 5207000 7 Obsolete kit was split in two kits 5207000 8 and 9 See Table 9 12 New Lower Op Panel FRUs Compatible Configurations on page 9 35 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Conso...

Страница 691: ...c insert x4 1 Y 73 LE9 TGC Slide Pot Knob Kit Spare Part only Knobs for ALPHA and for BOURNS version slide pots 5207000 9 See Table 9 12 New Lower Op Panel FRUs Compatible Configurations on page 9 35 Details of illustration P N 5207000 9 A 1 Friction Fit 2 ALPHA Slide Pot P N 5207000 9 B 3 Snap Fit 4 BOURNS Slide Pot 1 Y 74 Button Frame UI Assembly XYZ Button Replacement GA200270 2 1 Y Table 9 11 ...

Страница 692: ...robe Cable Hook Twin GA307069 1 Y 78 Probeholder Insert LOGIQ for small probes H4911P only available as a catalog Probeholder Insert for small probes like S4210 and L8 18I 1 N 79 4D Probeholder 5307472 1 Y 80 TVTR Probe Holder Assembly 5306880 To become obsolete If unavailable order 5306880 2 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts 14 of 18 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 693: ...l Warmer Unit 5245350 2 Replaced by 5245350 10 1 Y 84 Gel Warmer Unit 5245350 10 1 Y 85 Gel Warmer Knob Replacement Kit 5322780 1 Y 86 Right Support Assembly 5307243 Options Holder 1 Y 87 Left Support Assembly 5307245 Options Holder 1 Y 88 Tray Unit Assembly 5307236 OBSOLETE Replaced by 5307236 2 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts 15 of 18 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 694: ...93 Cable Audio High Pass 5460780 2 Y 94 Operator Panel Cable Kit GA200446 5207000 46 Replaced by 5207000 40 1 Y 95 Operator Panel Cable Kit Kit includes A Trackball USB Cable B1 and B2 Trackball Switch Cables C1 and C2 USB Video Board Flex Cables D HV Inverter Cable E A N Keyboard USB Cable 5207000 46 Replaces GA200446 Compatible with Operator panels 5207000 x 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts 16 o...

Страница 695: ...ht 4 Video 5 Customer USB Ports 6 Trackball 7 Power Upper to Lower 8 USB Upper to Lower 5497858 40 Compatible with Operator Panel Assembly 5208000 1 1 Y 97 A N Keyboard English 5207000 4 Alphanumeric Keyboard 1 Y 98 A N Keyboard French Canada 5207000 19 1 Y 99 A N Keyboard Russian 5207000 20 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts 17 of 18 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 696: ...UAL 9 34 Section 9 8 Top Console parts 100 A N Keyboard Greek 5207000 21 1 Y 101 A N Keyboard Swedish 5207000 22 1 Y 102 A N Keyboard Norwegian 5207000 26 1 Y Table 9 11 Top Console parts 18 of 18 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 697: ...7000 11 Backward compatible LE9 Lower Circuit Board for OP Panel Bourns Slide Pots spare part only Lower Circuit Board for OP Panel including the BOURNS Slide Pots 5207000 38 5207000 28 Backward compatible Includes the new knobs for the new TGC Slide Pots Part includes 1 Left Elastomer 1 Right Elastomer 1 Slide Pot Gasket 1 Switch PCB 8 BOURNS knobs compatible with BOURNS Slide Pots See FRU image ...

Страница 698: ...d with USB Video Board and Cable Order 5207000 40 or 50 Main Ctrl Board with USB Video Board and Cable install with old video cable Order 5207000 40 or 50 Main Ctrl Board with USB Video Board and Cable Order 5207000 50 Main Ctrl Board with USB Video Board and Cable LCD and Frame Order GA200439 Frame with LCD and TouchScreen Order 5207000 53 Order 5207000 39 Order 5207000 39 Aux USB Board Order GA2...

Страница 699: ... Voltage Inverter Part Number Comments 5207000 13 NEC NEC GA200442 ERG HV Inverter is not compatible Continue using NEC HV Inverter 5207000 23 NEC NEC GA200442 5207000 33 CMO NEC or ERG GA200442 5207000 6 recommended NEC HV Inverter can be used but may show intermittent issues turning on the back light at boot up 5207000 43 CMO NEC or ERG GA200442 5207000 6 recommended 5207000 53 CMO ERG 5207000 6...

Страница 700: ...ASM 5429346 See Table 9 16 XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor FRUs Compatibility Chart on page 9 41 1 Y 4 LOGIQ E9 R4 XYZ Motor Controller 5440179 Replaced by 5440179 3 1 Y 5 LOGIQ E9 R5 XYZ Motor Controller 5440179 3 Supports new LCD Monitor introduced with R4 x consoles See Table 9 16 XY Mech Brakes and Brake Motor FRUs Compatibility Chart on page 9 41 1 Y 6 XY Mechanism GA200036 Replaced by GA20094...

Страница 701: ...SA MFG 5393642 10 XY Brake Motor Assembly USA MFG 5393698 11 XY Brake Assembly GA200952 Replaces GA200535 2 Y 12 Z Mechanism GA200039 Use 5958000 1 Y 13 Z Mechanism Assembly 5958000 1 Y 14 Drive Gear Assy GA200177 Use 5396884 1 Y Table 9 15 XYZ Mechanism parts ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 702: ...Us Compatibility Chart on page 9 41 1 Y 16 Cable XYZ Switch Board 5198990 1 Y 17 Cable USB BEP to XYZ Motor Controller 5194492 6 Compatible with R2 0 4 or later 1 Y 18 Park Lock GA200161 1 Y 19 Park Lock USA Mfg 5393642 Substitute for GA200161 1 Y Table 9 15 XYZ Mechanism parts ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU BEP J25 XYZ MOTOR CONTROL 5194492 6 620 mm ...

Страница 703: ...mance to check the installed XYZ Motor Controller and update it to 5429346 if 5429346 is not installed yet 5429346 LOGIQ E9 XYZ Motor Controller with O ring Detection GA200644 GA200795 No Only compatible with P N GA200946 XY Arm Assembly and P N GA200952 XY brake Motor Assembly N A 5440179 LOGIQ E9 XYZ Motor Controller with O ring Detection 5429346 Supports new LCD Monitor introduced with R4 x and...

Страница 704: ...ack parts on page 9 48 3 Casters See Section 9 11 Casters Wheels parts on page 9 46 4 Covers See Section 9 7 Covers and Bumpers on page 9 9 5 Bulkhead Board Assembly GA200290 1 Y 6 Bulkhead Board Assembly RoHs compliant 5482676 1 Y 7 Fan Tray Assembly Card Rack 5141940 Replaced by 5141940 1 Y 8 Fan Tray Assembly Card Rack 5394406 Replaced 5141940 1 Y 9 Fan Tray and Filter Assembly Removable Fan Tr...

Страница 705: ...9 19 Subwoofer Details on page 9 45 1 Y 13 Subwoofer 5261127 2 R4 later production not backward compatible See Table 9 19 Subwoofer Details on page 9 45 1 Y 14 Air Filter Assembly Bottom 5316340 2 Refer to Table 9 18 Identifying Base Casting for proper Bottom Air Filter Assembly on page 9 44 to identify the correct FRU 1 Y Table 9 17 Main Console parts 2 of 3 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER D...

Страница 706: ... 16 Shearwave Capacitor Bank Assembly 5486895 1 Y Table 9 18 Identifying Base Casting for proper Bottom Air Filter Assembly Base Casting Identification Smooth on inside surface Base casting identified with smooth surface requires 5316340 2 Filter Assembly Cross hatching on inside surface Base casting identified with cross hatching requires 5391493 Filter Assembly Table 9 17 Main Console parts 3 of...

Страница 707: ... compatible The old Subwoofer P N 5261127 WILL NOT fit if a new Subwoofer was installed Subwoofer P N 5261127 2 attaches to the Base Casting using six pan head M3x12 fasteners and are torqued to 0 6 N m The Base Casting has six holes equally spaced on a 135 2 mm diameter to accommodate Subwoofer P N 5261127 2 6 Pan Head M4x12 fasteners torque 1 3 N m 6 Pan Head M4x12 fasteners torque 1 3 N m ...

Страница 708: ...els parts 1 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 Front Casters GA200245 Front Casters Front Wheels front w brake and lock 2 Y 2 Rear Casters GA200246 Rear Casters Rear Wheels rear swivel only 2 Y 3 Wheel Change Kit Rear Caster Replacement Tool FC200829 4 Pedal Mechanism 5311911 1 Y 5 Cam Pedal POM Polyoxymethylene Ichiro 5311753 1 Y ...

Страница 709: ...ewal Parts 9 47 6 Cover Brake Pedal GA307052 1 Y 7 Cover Pedal Release GA307053 1 Y 8 Cover Pedal Direction Lock GA307054 1 Y 9 Caster Brake Lock Release Assembly 5312180 1 Y Table 9 20 Casters Wheels parts 2 of 2 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 710: ...ns see 9 12 2 Front End Boards Compatible Configurations on page 9 59 For GTX Boards compatible configurations see 9 12 3 GTX Boards Compatible Configuration on page 9 63 Table 9 21 Card Rack parts 1 of 11 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 Card Cage Front Cover Assembly 5245458 1 Y 2 Card Cage Front Cover Assembly MRX 5245458 2 1 Y 3 Card Cage Front Cover Assembly MRX R4 consoles 52...

Страница 711: ...3 K85 K86 K159 K160 6 6 1 K 4 6 1 K K169 K170 K171 K185 K188 K1_J14 K288_J14 K289_J14 C134 C146 K1 K9 K10 K50 K51 K53 K54 K95 K96 K100 K102 K105 K106 K107 K121 K123 K124 K250 C130 C131 R9 R10 R13 R14 C64 CR1 U17 U16 U8 D7 D8 D9 D10 U10 U15 U18 Q1 Q2 R3 R11 R12 R15 R16 R17 R18 R20 R22 TP7 TP10 TP13 C98 C57 R103 R102 R55 C55 C49 C117 C115 C109 C110 C112 C58 R48 R50 R52 R54 R111 R95 C38 C39 R115 R120...

Страница 712: ..._J14 C134 C146 K1 K9 K10 K50 K51 K53 K54 K95 K96 K100 K102 K105 K106 K107 K121 K123 K124 K250 C130 C131 R9 R10 R13 R14 C64 CR1 U17 U16 U8 D7 D8 D9 D10 U10 U15 U18 Q1 Q2 R3 R11 R12 R15 R16 R17 R18 R20 R22 TP7 TP10 TP13 C98 C57 R103 R102 R55 C55 C49 C117 C115 C109 C110 C112 C58 R48 R50 R52 R54 R111 R95 C38 C39 R115 R120 C66 FL7 FL6 FL3 FL2 U13 K223 K228 K229 K230 K233 K234 K235 K239 K240 K244 K245 K...

Страница 713: ...116 C114 R310 R309 R308 C51 C50 C49 C48 C40 C39 C38 C37 C36 C33 C32 C29 16 8 24 32 U425 C1457 C1425 C1497 L1025 L1057 C1321 TP8 U122 C113 C115 R416 R418 C1539 C222 16 8 U299 R458 16 8 U490 C1449 16 8 U482 C1297 C1233 C1361 L1165 L1173 R1661 R1573 R1565 C2167 R1613 R1621 R1685 L1221 L1213 C1257 C1385 R1605 R1677 L1205 L1197 5 10 20 15 U457 C1377 C1249 C1313 C1529 C2163 R371 C43 C1134 C74 61 60 80 2...

Страница 714: ...32 4 8 U91 R301 R300 R298 R295 R294 C18 C236 L570 C1199 1 5 U82 L1017 C1489 C1417 16 8 24 32 U417 C1521 5 10 20 15 U449 C1647 L1049 L1189 C1305 C1369 C1241 L1181 R1669 R1589 R1581 L514 L513 R306 R297 C45 C35 C31 C22 C21 C20 C214 R372 C235 C19 C52 C53 R302 R292 R293 R303 R304 R305 C72 4 8 U92 C1281 C1217 C1345 L1133 L1141 R1645 R1541 R1533 C2162 16 8 U474 C1441 C1409 C1481 16 8 24 32 U409 L1041 C12...

Страница 715: ...14 R4_13 R2_13 R4_12 R2_12 R4_11 R2_11 R4_10 R2_10 R4_9 R2_9 R4_8 R2_8 R4_7 R2_7 R4_6 R2_6 R4_5 R2_5 R4_4 R2_4 R4_3 R2_3 R4_2 R2_2 R4_1 R2_1 R8_16 R7_16 R6_16 R5_16 R8_15 R7_15 R6_15 R5_15 R8_14 R7_14 R6_14 R5_14 R8_13 R7_13 R6_13 R5_13 R8_12 R7_12 R6_12 R5_12 R8_11 R7_11 R6_11 R5_11 R8_10 R7_10 R6_10 R5_10 R8_9 R7_9 R6_9 R5_9 R8_8 R7_8 R6_8 R5_8 R8_7 R7_7 R6_7 R5_7 R8_6 R7_6 R6_6 R5_6 R8_5 R7_5 R...

Страница 716: ...2 Q4_11 Q2_11 Q4_10 Q2_10 Q4_9 Q2_9 Q4_8 Q2_8 Q4_7 Q2_7 Q4_6 Q2_6 Q4_5 Q2_5 Q4_4 Q2_4 Q4_3 Q2_3 Q4_2 Q2_2 Q4_1 Q2_1 R12_16 U3_16 R11_16 R12_15 U3_15 R11_15 R12_14 U3_14 R11_14 R12_13 U3_13 R11_13 R12_12 U3_12 R11_12 R12_11 U3_11 R11_11 R12_10 U3_10 R11_10 R12_9 U3_9 R11_9 R12_8 U3_8 R11_8 R12_7 U3_7 R11_7 R12_6 U3_6 R11_6 R12_5 U3_5 R11_5 R12_4 U3_4 R11_4 R12_3 U3_3 R11_3 R12_2 U3_2 R11_2 R12_1 U3...

Страница 717: ... 5 C 2 5 _ 5 T P 3 3 T P 5 6 C237 C259 C 4 2 _ 1 2 C 3 8 _ 1 2 C 4 1 _ 1 2 C 3 9 _ 1 2 R 5 0 C 2 6 _ 1 2 C 2 9 _ 1 2 C 3 8 _ 1 1 C 2 6 _ 1 1 C 2 9 _ 1 1 C 3 9 _ 1 0 C 3 8 _ 1 0 R 6 9 C 2 6 _ 1 0 C 2 9 _ 1 0 C 3 8 _ 9 C 2 6 _ 9 C 2 9 _ 9 C 3 8 _ 8 R 6 7 C 2 6 _ 8 C 2 9 _ 8 C 3 8 _ 7 C 2 6 _ 7 C 2 9 _ 7 C 3 9 _ 6 C 4 2 _ 6 C 3 8 _ 6 R 6 6 C 2 6 _ 6 C 2 9 _ 6 C 3 8 _ 5 C 2 6 _ 5 BAR CODE A 5301040 x ...

Страница 718: ...2 R A 3 R A 1 U 5 P T 6 P T 7 P T 9 7 1 R C798 9 8 9 C U103 6 9 U U101 7 J 6 J 3 1 7 R R139 R141 R136 R135 R138 R140 R137 R153 R154 R829 0 3 8 R FL21_6 FL22_6 6 _ 1 0 1 C 6 _ 8 9 C 5 P S 5 3 2 C 6 8 U 2 9 U 1 J R315_6 R316_6 6 _ 8 5 3 R R227_6 R234_6 6 _ 0 1 3 R 5 6 1 C 6 _ 3 5 1 C 6 _ 2 5 1 C 6 _ 9 4 1 C 6 _ 4 4 1 C 6 _ 5 3 P S 1 0 2 C 5 0 2 C 5 9 1 C 6 _ 8 0 5 R 6 _ 1 U U32_6 U57_6 9 4 R 2 5 R 4...

Страница 719: ... 1 8 R R819 R821 3 6 8 C C722 4 3 2 C 3 3 2 C C987 C103_6 C310_6 C317_6 9 3 2 C C217 8 1 2 C 7 0 0 1 C 3 4 8 C 3 7 U 1 2 Q 0 2 Q 9 1 Q 3 2 Q 4 2 Q 6 2 Q 1 9 U 4 8 U 3 1 S D 5 1 S D 4 1 S D 6 7 U 5 8 U 8 7 U 0 8 U 6 _ 8 R V VR13 2 8 U 0 4 P T 2 4 P T TP43 5 4 P T 8 4 P T 2 5 P T 3 5 P T 4 5 P T 5 5 P T 6 _ 6 3 P T 3 Y R121 R120 R122 R123 R101 R102 R107 R108 R105 R106 R104 R103 6 _ 9 5 3 R 6 _ 7 5 3...

Страница 720: ... B A G D 0 1 6 P 1 1 A E D C B A 8 P 1 1 A E B A D C E D C B A 2 P 1 1 A 3 P 1 1 A E D C B A 4 P 1 1 A 1 1 1 1 5 1 G B D C B A G D 0 1 1 6 P 2 1 A 0 1 7 P 2 1 A 6 P 8 A E D C B A 1 8 P 8 A E B A D C 1 E D C B A 2 P 8 A 1 3 P 8 A 1 E D C B A 4 P 8 A G B D C B A 0 1 6 P 9 A D C B A 8 P 9 A 9 1 B A D C D C B A 2 P 9 A 2 2 3 P 9 A 9 1 D C B A 4 P 9 A 1 1 5 1 5 2 G D 0 1 E 1 A E A 9 1 1 E A 1 2 2 9 1 1...

Страница 721: ...C 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C C C C C C C 5205000 3 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C C 5205000 4 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C C C C C C C 5205000 5 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC N N N N N N N 5205000 6 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC N N N N N N N 5205000 7 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC N N N N N N N 5205000 8 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC N N N N N N N continued Minimum Software version required R1 0 6 R1 0 6 R1 0 6 R5 x x R5 x x MODE...

Страница 722: ... R1 x x R1 x R1 x R4 x R5 x MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION GRLY GA200630 GRLY GA200714 GRLY GA200714 2 GRLY GA200714 3 GRLY GA200714 4 R4 GRLY 5441000 R4 GRLY 5441000 2 5205000 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C C 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C C C C C C C 5205000 3 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C C 5205000 4 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C C C C C C C 5205000 5 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C C 5205000 6 LOGI...

Страница 723: ...9 220 240 VAC N N N N N N C C 5205000 5 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C N N 5205000 6 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C C C C C C N N 5205000 7 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C N N 5205000 8 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C N N continued Minimum Software version required N A N A R1 x x R3 x x R4 x x R1 x x R1 0 6 R3 x x R4 x x MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION Card Cage Front Cover Assembly MRX 5245458 2 5245458 3 C...

Страница 724: ...x x R2 x x R2 x x R4 x x R1 x x R4 x x R4 x x R5 x x MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION MPS 5205052 2 MPS 5205052 3 MPS Mitra 5205052 4 MPS Alpha 5205052 5 5205052 6 5205052 7 MPS Lambda 5205054 MPS Lambda 5205054 3 MPS Lambda 5205054 4 MPS Lambda 5205054 5 5205000 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C N N N N 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C C C C N N N N 5205000 3 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C C N 5205000 4 LOG...

Страница 725: ...le Update in SN70443A Closed FMIs on LOGIQ E9 LOGIQ 9 and LOGIQ 700 Consoles 5201044 3 Rev D or later are recommended If P N 5201044 3 is not available use P N 5201044 5 NOTE DO NOT mix 5201044 6 or 7 with earlier boards Table 9 26 GTX Boards Compatible Configurations System configuration GTX1 Slot 1 GTX1 Slot 2 GTX1 Slot 3 GTX1 Slot 4 Minimum Software Non CW GRX P N GA200295 Not populated P N 520...

Страница 726: ...ack End Processor parts for R4 x and later on page 9 68 For Back End Boards compatible configurations see 9 13 1 Back End Boards Compatible Configurations on page 9 71 Table 9 27 Back End Processor parts for R3 x and earlier 1 of 4 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 BEP with Extended Power Shutdown R2 x x and earlier 5145000 2 1 Y BEP with Extended Power Shutdown MRX 5145000 3 1 Y 2 ...

Страница 727: ...RN10 RN11 RN11 RN1 RN12 RN13 RN13 RN17 RN17 9 1 N R 0 2 N R 6 2 N R 7 2 N R 1 3 N R 0 3 N R RN34 RN34 5 3 N R 6 3 N R R1 R1 R2 R2 R3 R3 R4 R4 R8 R8 R9 R9 R10 R10 R11 R11 R13 R13 R15 R15 R30 R30 1 3 R 2 3 R 3 3 R 8 3 R 9 3 R R40 R40 1 4 R R45 R45 R46 R46 R47 R47 R48 R48 9 4 R 0 5 R 1 5 R 2 5 R R55 R55 R56 R56 R57 R57 R58 R58 R61 R61 2 6 R 3 6 R R64 R64 R65 R65 R66 R66 R68 R68 R69 R69 R7 R71 R72 R72...

Страница 728: ...Back End Processor BEP parts 9 Front Module 5301222 3 1 Y 10 BEP Fan 5198607 1 Y 11 BEP Cover with Battery Tray 5270660 1 Y 12 Shock Mount HD 5267412 6 Y Table 9 27 Back End Processor parts for R3 x and earlier 3 of 4 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 729: ...2404028 7 1 1 15 Extended Power Shutdown Assembly 5201018 2 1 Y 16 All BEP cables See Section 9 17 5 Back End Processor BEP cables 17 HDD Wipe Tool Kit 5329420 CD Tool plus instructions 1 Y 18 Option Dongle 5265980 1 Y Table 9 27 Back End Processor parts for R3 x and earlier 4 of 4 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 730: ... and later 1 of 3 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 BEP 6 1 LOGIQ E9 Ichiro R4 x and later 5380000 1 Revision 8 or later includes 500GB Hard Drive 1 Y 2 BEP6 X HDD Assembly Ichiro Spare Part includes HDD SATA and HDD Power Cables 5433408 50 1 Y 3 BEP6 X HDD Assembly 500GB includes HDD SATA and HDD Power Cables 5433408 51 1 Y 4 BEP6 X PowerBoard Assembly Spare Part 5433408 21 1 Y ...

Страница 731: ...are Part 5433408 30 1 Y 6 BEP6 X Video ByPass Board Ichiro Spare Part 5433408 90 1 Y 7 BEP6 X Front IO Assembly Ichiro Spare Part 5433408 40 1 Y 8 BEP6 X Bottom Fan Assembly Ichiro Spare Part 5433408 70 2 Y Table 9 28 Back End Processor parts for R4 x and later 2 of 3 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 732: ...e Part 5433408 60 1 Y 11 BIOS Battery 2404028 7 1 1 12 All BEP cables See Section 9 17 5 Back End Processor BEP cables 13 HDD Wipe Tool Kit 5329420 CD Tool plus instructions 1 Y 14 Option Dongle R4 x only 5265980 1 Y 15 DVR and S Video Options see Table 9 47 Options on page 9 106 Table 9 28 Back End Processor parts for R4 x and later 3 of 3 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 733: ...ons Key Table 9 29 Back End Boards Compatible Configurations Back End Boards Compatible Configurations Minimum Software R1 x x R1 x x R3 x x R3 x x R4 x R5 x MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION BEP 5145000 2 I O Board 5141000 3 BEP MRX 5145000 3 I O Board MRX 5321212 BEP6 5380000 1 Side I O Board 5433408 2 BEP6 5380000 1 5205000 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C N N C C C 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C C N N C C C ...

Страница 734: ...Supply R1 06 or later 5205052 3 Iif no stock use 5205052 4 Replaced by 5205052 4 1 Y 4 MAIN Power Supply no HUB R1 06 or later 5205052 4 Main PS 100V 240V Compatible with CW Option Same as 5205052 3 without a USB hub 1 Y 5 Alpha Main power supply R4 or later 5205052 5 This version is same as 5205052 3 with new Firmwave for R4 compatibility 1 Y 6 Alpha Main power supply no HUB R4 or later 5205052 6...

Страница 735: ...Ichiro with CW 5205054 2 Consoles 5205000 7 or later 1 Y 11 Main Power Supply Lambda R4 or later 5205054 3 Consoles 5205000 7 or later 1 Y 12 Lambda Main Power Supply Universal AC Input 100V 240V Ichiro with CW 5205054 4 Consoles 5205000 7 or later 1 Y 13 Lambda Main Power Supply Universal AC Input 100V 240V Ichiro R5 CW SWave 5205054 5 Consoles 5205000 8 or later 1 Y 14 Cover 4D MC Cover for Lamb...

Страница 736: ...ower Cords For these countries the proper Clamp is included in the Power Cord FRU Used on Power Cords 5148381 2 3 4 5 7 8 1 Y 16 4D Motor Control 5171810 Board 1 Y 17 4D Motor Control RoHS compliant 5171810 2 1 Y 18 4D Flex Cable 5270841 1 Y 19 USB Cable 4D Motor Controller Cherokee Mitra PS 5194492 4 1 Y Table 9 30 Power Supply parts 3 of 4 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU...

Страница 737: ...E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 75 20 USB Cable 4D Motor Controller Lambda PS 5194492 7 1 Y Table 9 30 Power Supply parts 4 of 4 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 4D MOTORCONTROL BEP J28 5194492 7 455 mm ...

Страница 738: ...ECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 76 Section 9 15 Peripherals Section 9 15 Peripherals For Peripherals compatible configurations see 9 15 3 Peripherals Compatible Configurations on page 9 81 ...

Страница 739: ...08 1 Y 4 USB Cable BW Printer Cable Q See Table 9 45 Peripherals Cables on page 9 100 1 Y 5 Power Cable BW Printer Cable R See Table 9 45 Peripherals Cables on page 9 100 1 Y 6 Report Printer Canon Pixma MP610 Note This model no longer available 1 Y 7 Report Printer HP470 KTZ300182 See Table 9 35 Peripherals Compatible Configurations on page 9 81 1 Y 8 Color Printer UPD 23MD 2401985 1 Y 9 Color Pr...

Страница 740: ... LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 78 Section 9 15 Peripherals 11 HP OFFICEJET 6100 ePrinter H611a 5535186 1 Y 12 USB Cable for External Printer 5315370 1 Y Table 9 31 Printer 2 of 2 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 741: ...ble 9 33 DVD FRUs Description and on page 9 80 and Table 9 34 DVD to DVR Compatibility on page 9 80 1 Y 3 DVD Assembly LOGIQ E9 not DVR Compatible 5305921 5 Replaces 5305921 Power and SATA separate cables See Table 9 33 DVD FRUs Description and on page 9 80 and Table 9 34 DVD to DVR Compatibility on page 9 80 1 Y 4 LE9 DVD Drive ASSEMBLY R4 5305921 2 Replaced by 5305921 4 or 5305921 6 Power SATA i...

Страница 742: ...ription Comments 5305921 3 DVD Assembly LOGIQ E9 DVR Compatible Included in the DVR Option H4908DR DVR Option Kit for LOGIQ E9 running R1 0 5 through R3 x x replaces 5305921 5305921 4 DVD Assembly LOGIQ E9 R4 DVR Compatible Included in the DVR Option H4913DR DVR Option Kit for LOGIQ E9 running R4 x x or later replaces 5305921 2 5305921 5 DVD Assembly LOGIQ E9 not DVR Compatible Compatible for LOGI...

Страница 743: ...ations Peripherals Compatible Configurations Minimum Software R3 x x R3 x x MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION UPD25 5389822 HP470 5205000 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C 5205000 3 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C 5205000 4 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C 5205000 5 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C 5205000 6 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C 5205000 7 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C 5205000 8 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C LOGIQ E9 Periph...

Страница 744: ...h America 5148381 1 Y 2 MAINS Power Cable China 5148381 5 1 Y 3 MAINS Power Cable Europe 5148381 3 1 Y 4 MAINS Power Cable UK Ireland 5148381 4 1 Y 5 MAINS Power Cable Japan 5148381 2 1 Y 6 MAINS Power Cable Switzerland 5148381 7 1 Y 7 MAINS Power Cable Denmark 5148381 8 1 Y 8 MAINS Power Cable Israel 5322309 1 Y 9 MAINS Power Cable India 5323270 Includes AC Clamp 1 Y 3 3 3 5148381 11 Rev x H4000Z...

Страница 745: ...12 MAINS Power Cable Australia 5327624 Replaced by 5323129 1 Y 13 MAINS Power Cable Australia 5323129 Includes AC Clamp 1 Y 14 MAINS Power Cable Brazil 5412975 Includes AC Clamp 1 Y Table 9 36 Mains Power Cables 2 of 2 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 5148381 11 Rev x H4000ZF WW YYYY Country of origin China LABEL 5148381 12 REV _ H4000ZM YYYYMMMDD XXXXXX MADE IN XXX Country...

Страница 746: ...0 4 LCD 12V HV INV USB UP DN LOCK BUTTONS TRACKBALL SWITCH BOARD 12V 5V GEL WARMER TEMP CONTROL MAIN LCD DISPLAY BULKHEAD PLATE DVI VIDEO 48V POWER AUDIO USB FOR OP PANEL USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL UP DN BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES MEMORY STICK MICROPHONE USB VIDEO TOUCH E G U W W 48V 5V P7 P8 P1 P2 P3 P4 J24 J22 J21 J25 J23 J18 J19 J15 J1 P5 P6 L 5V FROM J21 5V FROM J22 5V 12V USB HUB USB AUDIO MIC ...

Страница 747: ...N LOCK BUTTONS TRACKBALL SWITCH BOARD 12V 5V GEL WARMER TEMP CONTROL MAIN LCD DISPLAY BULKHEAD PLATE DVI VIDEO 48V POWER AUDIO USB FOR OP PANEL USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL UP DN BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES MAIN CABLE MEMORY STICK MICROPHONE USB VIDEO TOUCH G U 48V 5V P7 P8 P1 P2 P3 P4 J24 J22 J21 J25 J23 J18 J19 J15 J1 P5 P6 L 5V FROM J21 5V FROM J22 5V FLAT SCREEN 12V HV INV USB HUB USB AUDIO MIC 5V ...

Страница 748: ...248610 Cable G USB short cable inside the UI J24 P7 J25 P8 2 Y 3 Gel Warmer Power 5245462 Cable AA 1 Y OP PANEL REG REG UPPER OP BULKHEAD BOARD 48V USB AUDIO KEYBOARD USB ON CN4 CN7 CN10 J12 J26 ENABLE VPD OFF USB UP DN LOCK BUTTONS BUTTONS LIGHTS ROTARIES SLIDES BULKHEAD PLATE MEMORY STICK MICROPHONE J7 J5 3 3V 12V 12V 5V 48V P8 P1 P3 P4 J22 J21 J25 J23 J18 J3 J4 J17 P5 P6 J52 J51 J53 10 4 SVGA L...

Страница 749: ...y Cables on page 9 89 3 Cable Power Cable BEP 48V Cable I See Table 9 39 Main Power Supply Cables on page 9 89 4 Cable BEP to XYZ Motor Controller 5194492 6 Cable L USB Cable J25 XYZ Controller 1 Y 5 Cable XY Lock 5310448 Cable T XY Lock 1 Y XYZ CONTROLLER Z MOTOR 48V L FROG BRAKES INNER LEFT BRAKE INNER RIGHT BRAKE OUTER RIGHT BRAKE OUTER LEFT BRAKE X Y LOCK MOTOR B C C B T 48 VDC from Main Power...

Страница 750: ... DC DC CONVERTERS POWER FACTOR CORRECTION ISOLATION AND DC HEAD CONTROL 120VAC INVERTER USB MAIN POWER SUPPLY TO BEP J4 TO XYZ CONTROLLER 48V TO BEP J1 USB CABLE 4 D CONTROLLER J28 BB DC VOLTAGES FEP S MOTHERBOARD FEP S BOARDS X2 P4 on MPS TX POWER to FEP MOTHERBOARD to RELAY CARD X1 P3 on MPS MAIN POWER SUPPLY TO PRINTERS H A I 4D MOTOR CNTRL H BRIDGE DC DC CONVERTERS POWER FACTOR CORRECTION ISOL...

Страница 751: ...wer Cable BEP 48V 5194495 Cable I J1 Main Power Supply XYZ Controller 1 Y 5 Cable AC Power Cable BW Printer Cable R See Table 9 45 Peripherals Cables on page 9 100 6 Cable Brake Arm Left Right See Table 9 38 XYZ Motor Brake Control cables on page 9 87 1 Y 7 Cable Brake Arm Controller See Table 9 38 XYZ Motor Brake Control cables on page 9 87 1 Y 8 Cable USB cable to 4D MC 5194492 4 Cable BB J28 Ma...

Страница 752: ...ATED DRX DRX DRX GFI BACKPLANE BSCAN GFI AUDIO 4D MOTOR DRIVE MAIN POWER SUPPLY GFI Configuration CARD RACK PULSER VOLTAGES X1 P3 on MPS S 5V VPD I2C TO FROM BEP J5 FRONT PLANE TRANSDUCER BUS BOARD 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J MRX CARD RACK BACKPLANE A BSCAN DOPPLER AUDIO PCI EXPRESS 4D MOTOR DRIVE S 5V VPD I2C J1 J2 EXTRA PCI EXPRESS LANES RELAY MRX GTX GTX GTX PD METAL SHIELD METAL SHIELD METAL SHIELD J1 J...

Страница 753: ...ase 1 Version Backplane GFI R4 x and later 5391509 1 Y 4 Cable iPASS BEP6 to MRX Backplane LE9 R4 x and later 5431486 Cable J 1 Y BAYBIRD VGU OPTION CW PROBE CONNECTION BT2010 OPTION S USB POWER RELAY MRX GTX GTX GTX PD BACKPLANE A BSCAN PCI EXPRESS 4D MOTOR DRIVE CARD RACK 5V VPD I2C METAL SHIELD METAL SHIELD METAL SHIELD J1 J2 EXTRA PCI EXPRESS LANES DOPPLER AUDIO DC VOLTAGES X2 P4 on MPS PULSER...

Страница 754: ... Internal Cables 5 Cable Doppler MBD to Adapter CW Cable R2 x x GA200536 Cable S Part of CW Option 1 Y 6 V Nav Inside Cable 5439524 Cable EE Part of V Nav Inside Option 1 Y Table 9 40 Card Rack Cables 2 of 2 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU DRIVE BAY ...

Страница 755: ...DIO AMP AUDIO AMP USB Micro Controller IO Ports VPD USB 8 USB 7 USB 5 BSCAN 5stby 48V L R AUDIO OUT ON OFF SW PWR LED IO BOARD 5V 12V GFI AUDIO 5V 12V 48V 3 3V DVI A J21 J22 J29 J100 J30 J31 J32 J28 J27 J25 J26 J33 5stby J20 J36 J35 J34 J44 J42 J43 J40 J41 REAR PANEL USB HUB 3 J12 J14 J7 On systems running R2 0 3 or earlier Option Key was installed into J25 and these systems have no cable L REG 12...

Страница 756: ... ANALOG VIDEO 10 100bT AUDIO L AUDIO R EXT USB 2 EXT USB 1 DVI I OUT DOP DOP AUDIO REAR PANEL PATIENT I O BT2010 or later OPTION USB CN5 DVD 1 SATA SATA PWR SATA2 SATA1 SATA0 BAYBIRD VGU OPTION HARD DRIVE SATA SATA PWR CN18 USB 5 6 7 8 PCI PCI EXPRESS x1 EXPRESS x1 AUDIO IN L R CENTER AUDIO OUT ON OFF SW PWR LED M Z K Y 6 5 1 3 9 8 7 Na Na 2 10 12 11 IF NO DVR IF NO DVR CN4 CN21 CN1 ATX2 J3 J3 ATX...

Страница 757: ...SB H3 USB H4 USB 0 SATA 3 SATA 2 TO DVR DIGITAL AUDIO FUTURE 3 3V 5V 5V STBY 5V 12V 48V 28V BATT LAN CTRL USB 13 USB 1 USB 2 USB 3 USB 4 USB 5 USB 6 USB 7 USB 9 48v TO 28v CONVERT 28v TO 12v 28v BAT SOURCE SELECT 28v TO 5v 28v TO 3 3v Vbat Vbat 5vDUAL 5V STBY ACFAIL 48V ACFAIL 48V Vbat 5vDUAL 48V 12V 12V J3 J2 S VIDEO OUT OPTION J30 MOTHERBOARD CN SATA4 USB 1 2 LED S 16X PCI EXPRESS SPARE DVI I IN...

Страница 758: ...and later on page 9 97 Table 9 41 Back End Processor BEP Internal Cables BEP5 x R3 x and earlier 1 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 Cable Harness BEP Power With Extended Power Shutdown 5165844 2 Cable 1 1 Y 2 Cable Motherboard Harness 5193725 2 Cable 2 1 Y 3 Cable Front Panel Harness 5193726 Cable 3 1 Y 4 Cable PCI express bulkhead R3 x and earlier 5152291 Cable 4 1 Y 5 Cable ...

Страница 759: ...NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 Cable Kit R4 x 5433408 80 Kit includes PowerBoard to ChargeBoard PatIO ECG Power USB SATA Jumper Video Jumper Main Power Supply to PowerBoard Ribbon Cable 1 Y 2 Cable BEP to Card Rack BackPlane and PCI Express MRX and GFI R4 x and later See Table 9 40 Card Rack Cables on page 9 91 3 SATA Cable BEP6 MB to DVR 5439827 Cable 5 1 Y Table 9 41 Back End Processor B...

Страница 760: ...PC2GFI Card Cable J PCIe Express Cable See Table 9 40 Card Rack Cables 4 Cable DVD Power FREY Cable K See Table 9 45 Peripherals Cables 5 Cable USB XYZ Controller Cable L See Table 9 38 XYZ Motor Brake Control cables J28 BEP to XYZ Controller USB Cable 6 Cable SATA Cable External to DVD Cable M See Table 9 45 Peripherals Cables 7 Cable Audio Cable BEP to Subwoofer 5194498 Cable P J33 Subwoofer See...

Страница 761: ...er Cable Y See Table 9 47 Options 11 Cable V Nav USB BEP to BayBird Cable Z See Table 9 47 Options Table 9 44 New Subwoofer Cable Details Subwoofer Cable P N 5194498 NOT backward compatible Replace like for like or P N 5194498 2 can be used in place of P N 5194498 Subwoofer P N 5261127 2 Backward compatible Table 9 43 Back End Processor BEP External Cables 2 of 2 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMB...

Страница 762: ...7 Cable K J30 DVD 1 1 Y 2 Cable SATA Cable External to DVD 5270048 Cable M J3 DVD 1 1 Y 3 Cable powered eSATA to 15 7 DVD 5431110 Cable M J3 DVD 1 1 Y 4 Cable USB Cable BW Printer 5194492 2 Cable Q J26 BW Printer 1 Y BW PRINTER OPTIONAL USB PWR TO MAIN PWR SUPPLY Q Y DVD 1 SATA SATA PWR DVD ADAPT PWA BAYBIRD VGU OPTION USB POWER K Z M R M DVD 1 SATA SATA PWR BEP J29 J32 DVD POWER 5266407 REV BEP J...

Страница 763: ...able BW Printer 5194493 Cable R AC Power BW Printer 1 Y 7 Cable V Nav Baybird Power 5244550 Cable Y 1 Y 8 Cable V Nav USB BEP to BayBird 5194492 3 Cable Z 1 Y 9 Ferrites used in DVR Option 5324370 2 Y Table 9 45 Peripherals Cables ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU BW PRINTER ON TRAY BEP J28 5194492 10 860 mm BW PRINTER MAIN PWR SUPPLY AC OUT BEP J29 J32 BAYBIRD POWER 5244550 REV BEP J...

Страница 764: ... not including Japan Probes 1 of 4 PROBES CATALOG NUMBER PART NUMBER COMMENTS M4S D H40442LN 5224357 5499596 RoHs 1 5 4 3 MHz 3CRF H40442LP 5196216 5499502 RoHs Micro convex for biopsy M6C D H40432LM 5182312 5499598 RoHs 9L D H40442LM 5212849 5499510 RoHs 11L D H40432LN 5410800 5499499 RoHs ML6 15 D H40452LG 5410769 5499600 RoHs ...

Страница 765: ...ucer R2 x x H4908SN 5336208 S4 10 D Transducer R4 x and later H45302LA 5394804 RSP6 16 D H48651MR KTZ157046 KTZ303997 RoHs RIC5 9 D H48651MS KTZ157043 KTZ303987 RoHs RNA5 9 D H48651MY KTZ156994 KTZ303994 RoHs RAB2 5 D H48651MN KTZ157037 KTZ303980 RoHs Table 9 46 Supported Probes not including Japan Probes 2 of 4 Continued PROBES CATALOG NUMBER PART NUMBER COMMENTS ...

Страница 766: ...urved Array Probe R2 x x H4865IPM KTZ157038 KTZ303983 RoHs M5S D R2 x x H45551NH GE 3MIX P2D 2MHz CW Pencil Probe R2 x x H4830JE TE100024 P6D 6MHz CW Pencil Probe R2 x x H4830JG TQ100002 6Tc Multi plane Cardiac TEE Probe R2 x x H455512D KN100105 KN100107 RoHs 6S DLP Phase Array Pediatric Probe H45021RR 47236955 Table 9 46 Supported Probes not including Japan Probes 3 of 4 Continued PROBES CATALOG ...

Страница 767: ...D H40462LN 5405254 5499605 RoHs C1 6VN D H40472LW 5476279 C2 9VN D H40472LY 5488219 RAB6 D R4 x and later H48681MG KTZ302502 KTZ303986 RoHs C 1 6D H40472LT 5428393 5499606 RoHs Table 9 46 Supported Probes not including Japan Probes 4 of 4 Continued PROBES CATALOG NUMBER PART NUMBER COMMENTS ...

Страница 768: ...ystem Dual 8mm Sensor Assembly 5168286 30 2 Y 5 eTRAX Needle Sensor Spare Part Needle Tracking Option R2 0 5 or later 5408134 6 VirtuTRAX Sensor Spare Part Virtual Tracking Option R2 0 5 or later 5416625 7 V Nav Drive Bay 3D Tracking System Mid Range Transmitter Assembly for DriveBay 2 only 5457453 1 Y 8 Drive Bay 2 Flat Transmitter 5437445 1 Y 9 driveBAY 3D Tracking System Mid Range Transmitter 5...

Страница 769: ... 164L0025 Americas 1 Y 23 Lead Wires ECG AHA R2 x x 164L0027 Americas 1 Y 24 ECG Cables Short IEC R2 x x 2304616 Europe and Asia includes 164L0026 and 164L0028 1 Y 25 ECG Cables IEC R2 x x 2304615 Europe and Asia includes 164L0026 and lead wire port B1 1 Y 26 ECG Cable IEC Short R2 x x 164L0026 Part of 2304616 1 Y 27 Lead Wires IEC Short R2 x x 164L0028 Part of 2304616 1 Y 28 USB Footswitch R2 x x...

Страница 770: ...Mount Kit for External Display R2 x x KTZ220526 1 Y 35 DVI I to SVGA adapter for External Display R2 x x 5347051 1 Y 36 Advanced Digital Video Converter 2412280 1 Y 37 5V Medical Grade Adapter 2421169 1 Y 38 BEP6 x Scan Converter Board S Video Option 5433408 120 1 Y Table 9 47 Options 3 of 3 Continued ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU ...

Страница 771: ...ations Table 9 48 Options Compatible Configurations Options Compatible Configurations MODEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION R1 x x R1 x x R1 x x R2 x x R2 x x R2 x x R2 x x R4 xx R4 R5 R5 4D MC VNAV DVR CW Patient I O Footswitch WLAN Dongle WLAN BEP6 BEP6 Scan Converter Shear Wave V Nav Inside 5205000 LOGIQ E9 100 240 VAC C C C C C C C C C N C 5205000 2 LOGIQ E9 220 240 VAC C C C C C C C C C N C 5205000 3 LOGI...

Страница 772: ...ECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 110 Section 9 19 Options 9 19 1 1 LOGIQ E9 Options Compatible Configurations Key LOGIQ E9 Options Compatible Configurations Key N Not supported C Compatible ...

Страница 773: ...GIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment Table 9 49 Product Labels on LOGIQ E9 consoles used in a veterinary environment ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU 1 Side Cover Vet Label 5410085 2 Y 2 Probe Veterinary Label 5447716 1 Y 3 Vet Product Label 5454608 1 Y 5447716 For Veterinary use only 5454608 ...

Страница 774: ...L 9 112 Section 9 21 Hardware Kit Section 9 21 Hardware Kit Hardware Kit for LOGIQ E9 includes two boxes with hardware See Figure 9 17 and Figure 9 19 See Figure 9 18 and Figure 9 20 to identify and keep the kit organized Figure 9 17 Box 1 of 5310019 Kit ...

Страница 775: ... E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 113 Section 9 21 Hardware Kit cont d Use this Figure 9 18 to help identify contents of the Hardware Kit Box 1 and keep them organized Figure 9 18 Box 1 of 5310019 Kit contents and organization ...

Страница 776: ... REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 114 Section 9 21 Hardware Kit Section 9 21 Hardware Kit cont d Use this Figure 9 20 to help identify contents of the Hardware Kit Box 2 and keep them organized Figure 9 19 Box 2 of 5310019 Kit ...

Страница 777: ... E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 115 Section 9 21 Hardware Kit cont d Use this Figure 9 20 to help identify contents of the Hardware Kit Box 2 and keep them organized Figure 9 20 Box 1 of 5310019 Kit contents and organization ...

Страница 778: ...GE DIRECTION 5535208 100 REV 2 LOGIQ E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 116 Section 9 21 Hardware Kit This page was intentionally left blank ...

Страница 779: ...than listed in this manual Table 10 1 Contents in Chapter 10 Section Description Page Number 10 1 Overview 10 1 10 2 Why do Maintenance 10 2 10 3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10 2 10 4 System maintenance 10 7 10 5 Using a Phantom 10 9 10 6 Electrical Safety Tests 10 9 10 7 When There s Too Much Leakage Current 10 27 DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE THE AC DISTRIBUTION AND DC DISTRIBUT...

Страница 780: ...st be documented and maintained on the site Your GE service representative can help you with establishing performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program Contact GE for coverage and or price for service Section 10 3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10 3 1 How often should care maintenance tasks be performed The Care and Maintenance task schedule specifies how often your Ultrasound Syst...

Страница 781: ...d verify that all fans and peripherals turn on Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed Where applicable confirm that the battery is charged If no AC Input present use the internal battery 4 Probes Verify that the Ultrasound system properly recognizes all probes 5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel where present 6 InSit...

Страница 782: ...Blade Pocket clip 9 6757 6 pc Needle File Set 9 41594 Screwdriver Blade 1 8 in x 4 in 9 9487 Utility Knife 9 41581 Screwdriver Blade 3 16 in x 4 in 9 45341 Pliers Vice Grip 10 inch 9 39451 20 Steel Tape locking Spring load 9 3001 Xacto Pen Knife 9 GH807 Ratchet Offset Slotted 9 HT62002 Solder Aid Fork and Hook 68 412 Ratchet Offset Philips 9 4099 Mirror Round Telescoping 9 GH130 Tapered Reamer 9 G...

Страница 783: ... 9 45092 Pliers Linesman 8 1 2 inch 9 42679 Socket 10MM Hex for 1 2 in drive 2273333 9 42882 Punch Pin 3 32 inch 9 44262 Extension 10 inch for 1 2 in drive 2273405 9 42884 Punch Pin 5 32 inch 9 4258 3 8 inch to 1 2 inch Adapter 9 42886 Punch Pin 1 4 inch 9 34374 3 8 inch Metric Socket Set 12 PT 9 42973 Cold Chisel 1 2 inch 9 44311 16mm Socket 12 pt 9 GH77 Center Punch Automatic 9 33485 Metal Socke...

Страница 784: ...ere applicable verify basic 3D Mode operation Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation 6 RealTime 4D Mode Where applicable verify basic RealTime 4D Mode operation Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation 7 Basic Measurements Check Distance and Tissue Depth Measurement 8 Probe Elements Perform an Element Test on each probe to verify that all the p...

Страница 785: ... Step Item Description 1 Media Verify media drive s read write properlty Clean if necessary 2 B W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B W video page printer Clean heads and covers if necessary 3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer Clean heads and covers if necessary 4 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly Send an image to a DICOM device 5 ECG Verify bas...

Страница 786: ...and TGC lights 9 LCD Inspect the LCD Display for scratches and bad pixels Verify proper operation of Contrast and Brightness controls Where applicable confirm that the LCD arm allows swivelling the screen to the left and to the right folding the screen to the locked position release and adjustment backwards and forwards can be adjusted in the up down positions Note LCD Arm movement may vary and is...

Страница 787: ...l Safety Tests 10 6 1 Overview NOTE For all instructions in the Electrical safety tests section in case of using a UPS uninterruptible power supply the terms outlet wall outlet AC wall outlet and power outlet refer to the AC power outlet of the UPS In case of further available AC or DC power outlets at the same used UPS these must remain unused i e not connected to any other devices The following ...

Страница 788: ...uacy of strain relief and cable clamps Locate and examine all associated transducers Inspect the cables and strain relief at each end Inspect the transducer enclosure and lens for cracks holes and similar defects Equipment users must ensure that safety inspections are performed whenever damage is suspected and at least every 12 months in accordance with local authorities and facility procedures Do...

Страница 789: ...ear etc In case of unexplainable abrupt changes of safety test results consult experienced authorized service personnel or GE for further analysis Table 10 9 Leakage current limits for Ultrasound system operation on 100 120 Volt mains US Canada Japan Leakage Current Test System Power Grounding PE Conductor Limit in mA 1 Chassis Enclosure Leakage On and Off Open 0 3 Type BF Applied Parts On transmi...

Страница 790: ...operation on 230 240 Volt mains ISO on Dale 600 and Mains Applied on Dale 601 refer to the sink leakage test where mains supply voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass or sink to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage Table 10 11 ISO on Dale 600 and Mains Applied on Dale 601 Limits Probe Type Measurement BF 5 0 mA 5000 µA CF 0 05 mA 50 µA ...

Страница 791: ...eads and e TRAX Needle Sensor Type BF Body Floating or non conductive ultrasound probes which are marked with the man in box BF symbol this includes all transducers and ECG leads or Type CF Cardiac Floating or non conductive intraoperative probes for direct cardiac contact isolated ECG connections and e TRAX Needle Sensor which are marked with the heart in box CF symbol or Sink Leakage The current...

Страница 792: ...sed protectively earthed metal parts of the case The ground wire resistance should be less than 0 2 ohms Reference the procedure in the IEC60601 1 CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test Figure 10 1 Ground Continuity Test 1 Ultrasound System 3 Ohmmeter 2 Ground Pin 4 Accessible Metal Parts chassis non earth ground unprotected surface Ω 2 3 ...

Страница 793: ...er is connected to parts of the equipment easily contacted by the user or patient Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in Table 10 9 on page 10 11 Table 10 10 on page 10 11 as applicable Record the highest reading CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard When the meter s ground switch is OPEN don t touch the Ultrasound system CAUTION Equipment damage possibility Never switch the Po...

Страница 794: ... equipment under test power cable into the receptacle on the panel of the meter 3 Connect the meter to an accessible metal surface of the scanner using the cable provided with the meter 4 Select the Chassis or Enclosure leakage function on the meter NOTE Consult the manufacturer s user manual of the Safety Analyzer 5 Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off as indicated in T...

Страница 795: ... actual location of the test probe may vary by Ultrasound system NOTE Values in italics font are given as examples only Record all data in the Electrical safety tests log NOTE Values in italics font are given as examples only Table 10 13 Typical data format for recording enclosure chassis leakage Unit under test___________________________ Date of test _____________________ Test Conditions Measurem...

Страница 796: ...ed by touching some other grounded surface Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in Table 10 9 on page 10 11 Table 10 10 on page 10 11 as applicable For each combination the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition CAUTION Equipment damage possibility Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the system ...

Страница 797: ...NOTE Consult the manufacturer s user manual of the Safety Analyzer that will be used to perform the tests Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in Table 10 9 on page 10 11 Table 10 10 on page 10 11 as applicable For each combination the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition Figure 10 2 Set Up for Test of Earth Leaka...

Страница 798: ...Isolated patient lead source leakage lead to lead Select and test each of the ECG lead positions except ALL on the LEAD selector testing each to the power and ground condition combinations found in Table 10 9 on page 10 11 Table 10 10 on page 10 11 as applicable Record the highest leakage current measured ...

Страница 799: ...d to lead or Patient Auxiliary leakage function on the meter NOTE Consult the manufacturer s user manual of the Safety Analyzer Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off as indicated in Table 10 9 or Table 10 10 Typical data format for recording patient lead to lead leakage NOTE Values in italics font are given as examples only 10 6 9 Isolated patient lead sink leakage isolat...

Страница 800: ...TE Values in italics font are given as examples only 1 Connect Safety analyzer to wall AC power outlet 2 Plug the equipment under test power cable into the receptacle on the panel of the meter 3 Connect the ECG cable to the scanner and the Patient leads to the analyzer 4 Select the Lead isolation or main applied function on the meter NOTE Consult the manufacturer s user manual of the Safety Analyz...

Страница 801: ...obe Leakage Current The most common method of measuring probe leakage is to partly immerse the probe into a saline bath while the probe is connected to the Ultrasound system and active This method measures the actual leakage current resulting from the transducer RF drive Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in Table 10 9 on page 10 11 Table 10 10 on page 10 11 as applica...

Страница 802: ...long with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path NOTE The Saline solution is a mixture of water and salt The salt adds free ions to the water making it conductive Normal saline solution is 0 9 salt and 99 1 water If ready mixed saline solution is not available a mixture of 1 quart or 1 liter water with 9 or more grams of table salt mixed thoroughly will substitute Figur...

Страница 803: ... 10 on page 10 11 as applicable NOTE Values in italics font are given as examples only Table 10 15 Typical data format for recording probe source leakage CAUTION Equipment damage possibility Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the Ultrasound system is powered on Power off the Ultrasound system allow the stored energy to bleed down and turn the circuit breaker off BEFORE swi...

Страница 804: ...ectrical anode in saline solution The patient applied part of the probe is immersed into the saline solution Measure current flowing in the circuit leakage current As a minimum tests according to IEC606601 1 must be performed once a year The requirements for Body Floating BF have to be applied for TEE and Trans thorax probes bearing the symbol for safety class BF The symbol for BF is indicated on ...

Страница 805: ... probe will have some amount of leakage dependent on its design Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from an inter cavity probe Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the ...

Страница 806: ...stem and if situation can not be corrected submit a Safety Failure Report to document the Ultrasound system problem Remove Ultrasound system from operation 10 7 5 ECG Fails Inspect cables for damage or poor connections 10 7 6 Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check EQC and IQC Download and use the latest version of these forms They can be retrieved from MyWorkshop EQC Refer to DOC0929340 in MyWorkshop ...

Страница 807: ......

Страница 808: ......

Результаты поиска

Содержание 5205000

Отзывы:

Похожие инструкции для 5205000

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

GE 5205000, Руководство по обслуживанию

Результаты поиска

Содержание 5205000

Отзывы:

Похожие инструкции для 5205000

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды